Operating Instructions
Digital HD Video Cassette Recorder
Model No.
Model No.
AJ-HD1800P
AJ-HD1800E
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.
ENGLISH
F0907T0 -F @
Printed in Japan
VQT1H81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read this first! (continued)
For AJ-HD1800P
FCC Note:
CAUTION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER TO SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operation and
maintenance (service) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
Warning:
To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, the
user must use only shielded interface cables when
connecting to external units. Also, any unauthorized
changes or modifications to this equipment could void
the user’s authority to operate it.
Notice (U.S.A. only):
This product has a fluorescent lamp that
contains a small amount of mercury. It also
contains lead in some components. Disposal
of these materials may be regulated in your
CAUTION:
This apparatus can be operated at a voltage in
the range of 100 – 240 V AC.
Voltages other than 120 V are not intended for
U.S.A. and Canada.
community
due
to
environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling
information, please contact your local
authorities, or the Electronics Industries
Alliance:
CAUTION:
Operation at a voltage other than 120 V AC may
require the use of a different AC plug. Please
contact either a local or foreign Panasonic
authorized service center for assistance in
selecting an alternate AC plug.
<http://www.eiae.org.>
indicates safety information.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read this first! (continued)
For AJ-HD1800E
Caution for AC Mains Lead
FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This product is equipped with 2 types of AC mains cable. One is for continental Europe, etc. and the other one is only
for U.K.
Appropriate mains cable must be used in each local area, since the other type of mains cable is not suitable.
FOR CONTINENTAL EUROPE, ETC.
FOR U.K. ONLY
Not to be used in the U.K.
If the plug supplied is not suitable for your socket out-
let, it should be cut off and appropriate one fitted.
FOR U.K. ONLY
How to replace the fuse
1. Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains
plug for your safety and convenience.
A 13 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the
replacement fuse has a rating of 13 amps and that it is ap-
proved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
body of the fuse.
or the BSI mark
on the
2. Replace the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must en-
sure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a
replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your lo-
cal Panasonic Dealer.
Fuse
„ DO NOT REMOVE PANEL COVERS BY UNSCREWING THEM.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove the covers. No user serviceable parts inside.
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
indicates safety information.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturerÅfs instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider
than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the
obsolete outlet.
10)Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
11)Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12)Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a
cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13)Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14)Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
Contents
Example of connections performed
for one VTR.........................................................21
Example of connections performed
for two VTRs (deck-to-deck) ...............................21
Example of connections in 23/24 Hz or 25/50 Hz
(HD) mode ..........................................................22
Example of connections in 25/50 Hz (SD)
mode...................................................................22
Example of connections with an editing
controller .............................................................23
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents (continued)
Variable memory playback operation
procedure..........................................................36
Variable memory editing operation
procedure..........................................................37
<Menu management accompanying
switching the system frequency>....................113
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General outline
This unit is a multi-format VTR capable of recording and
playing back HD signals (1080i/59.94 Hz, 1080i/50 Hz,
720p/59.94 Hz, 720p/50 Hz) in DVCPRO HD-LP* format
using a small cassette tape 1/4 inch wide, HD (DVCPRO
HD-LP/DVCPRO HD) and SD (DVCPRO50/DVCPRO)
recorded in DVCPRO format as well as conventional
consumer DV/DVCAM tapes.
A down-converter as a standard feature verifies all tapes
using analog composite signals and SD SDI output.
Furthermore, output signals converted to 1080/24PsF can
be obtained from the 720/24p over 60p source recorded with
the variable frame rate camera. These signals can be used
for cinema as well.
Similarly, each of the following output signals can be
obtained.
z 720/25p over 60p sources can be converted to 1080/25
PsF or 576i format output signals.
z 720/50p over 60p sources can be converted to 720/50p,
1080/50i or 576i format output signals.
By mobilizing highly efficient digital compression technology
to assure a high picture quality, this VTR significantly
minimizes deterioration in the picture quality and sound
quality during the dubbing process.
It features a compact size of 4U and a lightweight design
that enables it to be carried around with ease, and to be
readily installed in a 19-inch rack.
The equipment is set up using an interactive system
whereby the operator manipulates the function buttons on
the front panel and observes the menu screens on the front
panel’s LCD monitor.
In terms of the editing features, this VTR is capable of both
assemble editing and insert editing.
* DVCPRO HD-LP has the same format as DVCPRO HD
EX described in the operation manual for our camera
recorder.
Standard accessories
Power cord (AJ-HD1800P) 1
Power cord (AJ-HD1800E) 2
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
Compact size and light weight
Digital slow motion/dial jog
This is a 4U digital VTR. Using the rack-mounting
adapters (AJ-MA75P: optional accessory), it can also be
easily housed in a 19-inch rack.
Panasonic’s unique digital slow motion technology
enables clear playback (of tapes recorded using the
DVCPRO HD-LP system) at speeds ranging from j1k to
i2k.
Up to 126 minutes of recording
<Note>
Using the DVCPRO HD-LP recording system, up to 126
minutes of material can be recorded on the 1/4-inch XL-
size cassette tape.
Some noise may occur during slow playback (using an
external controller) at speeds of almost exactly j1k or
i2k.
High picture quality
Search speed
The VTR’s high picture quality is achieved by 4:2:2 HD
component signal recording using a recording rate (100
Mbps) which is 4 times higher than that of the existing
DVCPRO format.
Search speed enables tapes (recorded using the
DVCPRO HD-LP system) to be played back with color
images at speeds of up to 100 times in the forward or
reverse direction.
1080i/720p, 59.94 Hz/60 Hz/50 Hz signal switching
By making menu selections, the signals of the respective
formats can be recorded and played back.
Time codes
This VTR comes with a built-in time code generator
(TCG)/time code reader (TCR).
In addition to the internal time code, an external time
code can also be input and recorded as the LTC on the
VTR.
No guarantees are made for the recording in 1080-60 Hz.
Frame rate conversion function
By making menu selections, the VTR can output signals
after converting them to the 1080/24PsF format when it
plays back a tape recorded by a variable frame rate
camera at a frame rate of 24fps.
When playing back a tape recorded at a frame rate of 25
fps, the tape’s signals can be converted to the 1080/25
PsF or 576i format and output. When playing back a tape
recorded at a frame rate of 50 fps, the tape signals can be
converted to the 1080/50i or 576i format and output.
UMID information recording and playback
This unit supports the recording/playback of UMID
(Unique Material Identifier) information in the SMPTE
330M standard. UMID information can be confirmed with
the diagnostic menu.
VTRs that do not support the recording/playback of
UMID information will not playback UMID information
correctly. In addition, when VTRs that do not support
recording/playback of UMID information are connected
to this unit, UMID information will not be recorded
correctly.
<Notes>
z Use tapes that are shot with a variable frame rate
camera.
z Do not use dubbed or edited tapes. The tape control
information may be lost, making it impossible to convert
the signals for playback.
VANC data recording/playback
VANC data packets that added to the Y stream of HD SDI
can be recorded with the video signal. In addition, VANC
data packets can be played back with the Y stream of HD
SDI.
Gamma correction of cinema for film
This feature corrects the image from a variable frame rate
camera in cinema gamma mode for film to an image with
film quality.
SDI interface
The VTR comes with an HD/SD serial digital interface as
a standard accessory.
Playback compatibility with DVCPRO systems
Besides DVCPRO HD-LP recording and playback, the
VTR can also play back tapes which have been recorded
using the existing DVCPRO HD, DVCPRO50 and
DVCPRO systems.
Consumer-use DV tapes (SP) and DVCAM tapes can
also be played back on this VTR.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features (continued)
Multi-functional interfaces
8-channel high-sound-quality digital audio
The 8-channel PCM audio feature allows for not only
independent editing but mixing as well on all 8 channels.
One channel is provided for the analog cue track.
zSerial digital input/output connector
The VTR comes with an HD component serial interface
input/output connector. This one BNC connector
enables HD component video signals and 8-channels
digital audio signals to be interfaced. (SMPTE 292M,
296M, 299M)
It is also equipped with an HD/SD format converter as
a standard accessory so that SD component serial
signals can also be output. (SMPTE 259M-C, 272M-
A, ITU-R BT.656-4)
Menu-driven setup
The setup settings, which are conducted prior to
operating the VTR, are performed while the operator
views the setup menus either on the VTR’s LCD monitor
or on a TV monitor.
Multi-functional front panel with LCD monitor
The front panel’s multiple functions, including the LCD
monitor for monitoring images, the function buttons and
large-size display panel, are contained within the 4U
dimensions and designed to improve operating ease.
z Analog video output connector
Composite signals are output during DVCPRO50- or
DVCPRO-compatible playback, DV playback, DVCAM
playback and down-conversion.
z AES/EBU audio input/output connectors
Digital audio input/output connectors for 8 channels are
featured as a standard accessory.
z Up-conversion recording of SD signals
SD component serial signals (SMPTE 259M-C, 272M-
A, ITU-R BT.656-4) can be up-converted and recorded
as HD signals.
z 9-pin RS-422A and RS-232C remote control connec-
tors
In addition to the standard 9-pin serial remote (RS-
422A) control connector, the VTR is provided with RS-
232C and 50-pin parallel remote control connectors.
The RS-422A facility enables parallel operation if a loop
connection has been established between the VTR and
another VTR.
z IEEE1394 digital input/output
It is possible to input and output data in accordance
with the IEEE 1394 standard.
<Note>
INSERT and ASSEMBLE editing will not work when
[1394] is selected as the menu item No.600 (VIDEO IN
SEL).
<Playback formats and output formats>
Playback format
DVCPRO HD-LP,
DVCPRO HD
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
Output format
DVCPRO HD,
DVCPRO50, DV
DVCPRO50, DV
DVCPRO, DV
DV
DV, DVCAM
DVCPRO HD,
DVCPRO50, DV
In case of EE and REC modes:
<Note>
When any of the settings below is established, no signals
will be output from the IEEE1394 digital interface.
z When “60/24” is selected as the menu item No.030 HD
FREQUENCY setting
z When “23/24,” “25 (HD),” “25 (SD),” “50 (HD),” or “50
(SD)” is selected in menu item No. 025 SYSTEM
FREQ.
z When the edit mode is selected while the output
format is set to other than DVCPRO HD.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions
Front panel (1)
Cassette insertion slot
If the slot’s orange plate is visible, it means that a cassette
tape is already inserted.
EJECT button
When this button is pressed, the cassette is unloaded,
and a few seconds later it is ejected automatically.
When CTL appears on the counter display, the display is
reset.
Headphones jack
The sound heard during recording, playback or editing
can be monitored through headphones when stereo
headphones are connected to this jack.
POWER switch
Audio level meter
The audio information is displayed here.
Volume control dial
This control dial is used to adjust the volume level of the
headphones and monitor output.
z The levels of the CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6,
CH7 and CH8 PCM audio signals and level of the CUE
track signal are displayed here.
Whether the volume level of the monitor output is to be
coupled together with that of the headphones to this dial
or separated can be selected using the setup menu item
No.712 (MONI OUT). (Note that the volume level of the
headphones is coupled at all times.) When the volume
levels have been separated, the UNITY value (prescribed
value) applies to the monitor output.
z The levels of the input signals are displayed during
recording and when EE is selected.
During playback, the levels of the playback signals are
displayed. In the INPUT CHECK status, the levels of
the input signals are displayed for CH1 to CH8.
z Input signal display for each of the channels
The indicators for the selected input signals light.
(When the SD SDI input is selected, the SDI indicator
lights. When the 1394 input is selected, the HD lights.)
If no input signal is selected, the AES/HDSDI/SD SDI/
1394 indicator blinks while the ANA indicator lights con-
tinuously.
Channel condition lamps
These lamps light to indicate the error rate status.
(Green>amber>red)
Green: This lights when the error rates for the video and
audio playback signals are both at acceptable
levels.
When the internal signal (INT SG) is selected, all AES/
ANA/HD SDI indicators light.
Amber:
All indicators are off in 23/24 Hz mode or 25 Hz (HD,
SD) and 50 Hz (HD, SD) mode.
This lights when the error rate for either the video
or audio playback signals has deteriorated. The
playback picture and sound remain unaffected
even while this lamp is lighted.
Input signal display
Red: This lights when correction or interpolation has
been engaged for either the video or audio
playback signals.
AES ANA
HD SDI
AES ANA
HD SDI
dB
dB
Level meter
0
4
8
-
-
•4
•3
•2
•1
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
•16
•12
•8
-
-
-
-
-
-
12
16
20
25
30
40
•4
Reference
level indicator
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-
-
-
-
5
10
20
-
L R
L R
Left (L) and right (R)
monitor channel
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
Front panel (2)
REMOTE buttons and RS-232C display
These buttons are used when this VTR is to be controlled
from an external component using the REMOTE, RS-
232C or parallel connector.
9P 1394:
Press the button for 2 seconds or more, the LED
lights, and the unit can be controlled by a device
connected through the REMOTE connector, the
(IN/OUT) connector, or the DVCPRO/DV
connector. Release the control by pressing the
button for 2 seconds or more.
MONITOR SELECT buttons
50P: When this button is pressed for 2 or more
seconds, its LED lights, and it is possible to
control the VTR from a unit which has been
connected using the 50-pin parallel mode
connector. Release the control by pressing the
button for 2 seconds or more.
These buttons are used to select the audio signals which
are to be output to the monitor L and R connectors and
headphones jack.
F6
M MIX setting
z
When OFF has been selected as the
on the <AUDIO SHIFT2> menu (factory setting):
Each time the L (or R) button is pressed, the
signal to be output to the monitor L (or R)
connector is changed in the following sequence
and displayed on the audio level meter: CH1 >
CH2 > CH3> CH4 > CH5 > CH6 > CH7 >
CH8 > CUE > CH1, etc.
RS-232C display:
This LED lights when communication has been
enabled between the VTR and the unit which has
been connected to the RS-232C connector. The
display can be switched in SETUP MENU No.204
(RS232C SEL).
F6
z When L, R or L/R has been selected as the
M
AUTO OFF lamp
MIX setting on the <AUDIO SHIFT2> menu:
This lamp lights when a problem has occurred with the
VTR’s operation, and details of the problem appear on the
time code display.
At this setting, the signals of a multiple number of
channels can be mixed and output.
When the number key corresponding to the
channel whose signals are to be monitored is
pressed while the L (or R) button is held down,
that channel is selected and its signals are
displayed on the audio level meter. By
performing the same operation, the selected
channel can be de-selected.
However, a maximum of only two channels from
CH1 to CH4 and a maximum of only two
channels from CH5 to CH8 can be selected.
Example of channels which can be selected:
CH1 i CH3 i CH5 iCH8 > OK
LCD monitor
The monitor is operated as a simple monitor for playing
back tapes or displaying EE images and menu display.
If the VTR is left in a state where no controls on the front
panel are operated or where the tape is not running, the
monitor display is automatically turned off in order to
protect the monitor. When the next VTR operation is
started, the monitor display comes back on.
<Note>
Some images may not be displayed. Use another monitor
CH1 + CH2 + CH4 > NG
to check the images.
METER (FULL/FINE) selector button
This button is used to select the scale display for the
audio level meter.
Function buttons
These buttons operate the function menu (refer to page
38).
SHIFT
:
FULL mode:
This is used to switch pages on the current
function menu.
According to the settings in SETUP MENU No.
763 (METER SCALE)*, the range from j∞ dB
to 0 dB or the range from j∞ dB to +20 dB is
displayed.
F1
F6
to
:
These are used to change the settings of the
setting items enclosed in the frame at the bottom
of the time code display.
FINE mode:
According to the settings in SETUP MENU No.
763 (METER SCALE)*, the range from j24 dB to
j15 dB or the range from j4 dB to +5 is
displayed at intervals of every 0.5 dB.
The reference level is displayed with the
To change a setting, keep pressing the
F1
F6
) until
corresponding function button (
to
the desired numerical value appears;
alternatively, press the corresponding function
button to highlight the setting of the setting item,
and then turn the ADJUST dial until the desired
numerical value is obtained.
reference level indicator
on the right side of the
level meter. The reference level can be changed
in SETUP MENU No. 776 (REF LEVEL)
* This menu is not displayed for AJ-HD1800E.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
Front panel (3)
DIAG: This enables confirmation of information such as
the warning/hour-meter/UMID. On the SHIFT
screen, the error log files can be checked and
deleted.
MENU:
On this menu, it is possible to transfer operation
to the screen on which operations (adjustments
and saving data in or loading it from the internal
memory and SD memory card) relating to the
SYSTEM and SETUP menus are to be
performed.
the function menus.
Time code display
The data, VTR status information, tape format information
or warning information which corresponds to the direct
following for details of the displays.)
ASSEM button
This button is used to perform assemble editing.
When it is pressed, the <ASSEMBLE> menu appears on
F1
the time code display. Setting ASSEM to ON using
enables assemble editing, and the lamp of the ASSEM
button lights.
Even after operation is transferred by another direct
menu, the assemble mode will remain established while
the ASSEM button lamp is lighted.
Press the [F1] button when the <ASSEMBLE> menu is
displayed to turn OFF the ASSEM item on the screen.
The ASSEM button lamp now goes off and the assemble
mode is released
UNITY lamps
VIDEO UNITY lamp
This lights if all image output levels of the HD/SD
are UNITY.
AUDIO UNITY lamp
This lights if the UNITY level applies for the PCM
or CUE AUDIO input or output level. (The lighting
of the lamp complies with the setting selected for
setup menu item No.142 (AUDIO UNITY).)
INSERT button
Direct menu buttons
This button is used to perform insert editing.When it is
pressed, the <INSERT> menu appears on the time code
display, and the function menu for selecting the signals to
be edited is displayed.
These buttons are used to switch directly to the function
menus on the time code display.
HOME:
The most basic settings of recording, playback
and time code operations are selected on this
menu.
To select the signals to be edited, press the function key,
and highlight the display.
The highlighted display
indicates that those signals are selected.
To release the selection, press the same function key
again.
VIDEO:
The basic input and output settings for the video
signals are selected on this menu. The level of
the HD output signals can also be adjusted on
this screen.
Use F1 to F6 to select the V, A1, A2, A3, A4 and CUE
SHIFT
F2
signals; use
+
to to select the A5, A6, A7,
F6
A8 and TC signals.
AUDIO:
The basic input and output settings for the audio
signals are selected on this menu.
PF1: This enables user-defined menu items to be
registered in the function keys.
PF2: This enables user-defined menu items to be
registered in the function keys.
ADJUST dial (ADJ dial)
This is used for the menu and other operations.
TC:
The settings related to the time code are selected
on this menu. Superimposing the time code on
the display can also be set on this screen.
CUE: This enables up to 60 cue points to be set. In the
PAGE mode, 10 pages with 6 cue points on each
page are provided so that the cue points can be
managed on a page-by-page basis.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
Front panel (4)
REV, STILL and FWD lamps
These lamps light to reflect the way in which the search
dial is operated.
REV: This lights when the dial is turned
counterclockwise, and the tape runs in the REV
direction while the search button lamp is lighted.
STILL: While the JOG lamp is lighted, this lights when
the dial rotation is stopped, and the tape also
stops running.
While the SHTL/SLOW lamp is lit, it lights when
the dial is at the still-picture position.
FWD: This lights when the dial is turned clockwise, and
the tape runs in the FWD direction while the
search button lamp is lighted.
Search button
Press this button to shift to the search mode. Set the
search dial to the shuttle mode and turn to any position,
and then press this button to start playback at the rate set
with the search dial.
Audio input and output level control dials
These are used to adjust the recording or playback levels
of the CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7 and CH8
PCM audio signals.
z Switching between the LOCK or UNLOCK status for the
volume level operations
SHTL/SLOW button
This is the button to select SHTL or SLOW for the search
dial. Every time this button is pressed, the search dial
shifts alternately between the SHTL and SLOW modes.
When a dial is pressed, the LED above the dial either
lights (LOCK) or goes off (UNLOCK).
In the LOCK (lighted) status, only the display segments
corresponding to the current audio level light, and the
audio level remains unchanged even when the dial is
turned.
In the UNLOCK (off) status, the display segments cor-
responding to the current audio level and all the display
segments below light, and the audio level can be
changed.
Search dial
This is the dial to search the edit point. The mode shifts
alternately between SHTL/SLOW and JOG each time the
dial is pressed, and the lamp for either JOG, SHTL, or
SLOW lights. When the power is turned on, the unit
operates once the dial returns to the STILL position.
SHTL (shuttle) mode:
While the lamp is lit for SHTL of JOG/SHTL/
SLOW, turn the dial and stop at any position to
play back images at the rate indicated by the
position of the dial. When the dial is at the center
position, images become still pictures.
z Switching between UNITY or VAR
UNITY or VAR can be selected when the dial knob is
pressed while holding down the
F
key among the
number keys in the UNLOCK status. The position of
the segment lighted at the center indicates the UNITY
level.
SLOW mode:
While the lamp is lit for SLOW of JOG/SHTL/
SLOW, turn the dial all the way to the left to play
back images at a rate 4.9 times slower than the
standard rate. When the dial is at the center
position, images become still pictures. Turn the
dial all the way to the right to play back images at
a rate 4.9 times faster than the standard rate.
SLOW speed can be selected in SETUP MENU
No. 308 (VAR FWD MAX) and No. 309 (VAR REV
MAX). The rate at the click point can be selected
in the SETUP MENU No. 313 (CLICK POINT).
JOG mode:
z Switching between REC or PB
The AUTO, REC or PB volume level function can be
selected using F1 of “AUDIO SHIFT2” on the AUDIO
function menu.
With AUTO, the recording controls are automatically
selected during recording or in the EE or INPUT
CHECK status, and the playback controls are automati-
cally selected during playback.
z Switching between CH1jCH4 and CH5jCH8
The
audio channel selector button is used to
switch between these two sets of channels.
In this mode, there are no clicks when turning the
dial. Playback speed is determined by how far the
dial is turned. The maximum rate can be selected
in SETUP MENU No. 310 (JOG FWD MAX) and
No. 311 (JOG REV MAX)
<Notes>
z The CUE audio input/output level is adjusted in
SETUP MENU No. 790 (CUE REC VOL) and No. 791
(CUE PB VOL).
z While the input is 1394, the audio input level cannot
be adjusted.
JOG/SHTL/SLOW lamp
This lamp indicates the search dial mode.
JOG:
This lamp lights in JOG mode.
SHTL/SLOW:
This lamp lights in SHTL/SLOW mode.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
Front panel (5)
PREROLL button
This button is used to locate where a transmission or
manual editing starts on the tape.
When it is pressed, the tape travels to the preroll point
and it stops there.
When the cue time has been registered on the HOME,
PF1 or PF2 screen:
The tape is prerolled from the registered cue time
F1
using the preroll time which was set using
(PREROL) on the <HOME SHIFT> menu.
When the search mode is established on the CUE
screen:
The tape is prerolled from the selected cue point
using the preroll time which was set using F5
(CU-ROL) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.
The preroll operation is not performed when the
selected cue point has not been registered or
when the cue point registration mode is
established.
Audio channel selector button
Use this button to select whether the audio controls for
channels CH1 to CH4 or for channels CH5 to CH8 are to
be controlled.
Each time it is pressed, the channel display LED above
the audio control is selected.
In all other situations:
Number keys
Use these keys to input the numerical values of the CUE
points, edit points, etc.
The tape is prerolled from the registered IN point
(or the current tape position when the IN point
has not been registered) using the preroll time
By pressing a number keys from
1
to
9
while the
F
F1
which was set using [
<HOME SHIFT> menu.
(PREROL) on the
key is held down, alphabet letters from A to F which are
used for the user bits or letters from A to Z which are used
to compose filenames can be input.
If the PREROLL button is pressed when the IN
point has not been registered, the current tape
Since a multiple number of letters are allocated to each
number key, keep tapping the number key until the
desired letter is selected. To change the input position,
use the ADJUST dial, and then proceed with the input.
position is automatically registered as the IN point
[but only when ENA has been selected as the
setup menu item No.305 (AUTO ENTRY) setting].
When the PREROLL button is pressed together with the
IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) button, the tape can be cued
up to the registered point concerned. To cue up the tape
for the cue time registered on the HOME, PF1 or PF2
screen, press the PREROLL button while holding down
PREVIEW/REVIEW button
PREVIEW:
When the button is pressed after an edit point has
been registered, the tape travels and the editing
can be previewed without actually performing the
editing.
F
the
key among the number keys.
IN (A IN), SET and OUT (A OUT) buttons
If the button is pressed when the IN point has not
been registered, the point where it was pressed is
registered as the IN point, and preview is
executed using this IN point.
When the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) button is pressed
together with the SET button, the IN (A IN) or OUT (A
OUT) point is registered.The A IN and A OUT buttons are
used to register audio IN and OUT points that differ from
the corresponding video points during audio split editing.
When an IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) point has been
registered, the lamp of the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT)
button which has registered that point lights. When these
buttons are pressed after points have been registered,
the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) point value appears on the
counter display.
REVIEW:
When the button is pressed after a section has
been edited, the just edited section is played
back, and it can be reviewed on the recorder’s
monitor.
AUTO EDIT button
When this button is pressed after the edit points have
been registered, automatic editing is initiated.
If the button is pressed when the IN point has not been
registered, automatic editing is initiated with the point
where the button was pressed serving as the IN point.
C
When the
button is pressed while holding down the IN
(A IN) or OUT (A OUT) button, the registration of the IN (A
IN) or OUT (A OUT) point is cleared.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
Front panel (6)
<Note>
No guarantees are made for the sound played back in the
search mode.
PLAY button
Press this button to start playback.
When this button is pressed together with the REC
button, recording starts; when this button is pressed
together with the EDIT button during playback, manual
editing starts.
However, manual editing will not be initiated if the servo is
not locked.When only the PLAY button is pressed during
manual editing, editing is exited, and the playback mode
is established.
TRIM buttons
These buttons are used to make fine adjustments to the
IN or OUT point.
REC button
By pressing the or j button while the IN (A IN) button or
OUT (A OUT) button is held down, the registered edit
point can be adjusted in 1-frame increments. When the i
button is pressed, the point is moved ahead by one frame;
conversely, when the j button is pressed, it is moved
back by one frame.
When this button is pressed together with the PLAY
button, recording starts.
SERVO lamp
This lamp lights when the drum servo or capstan servo
locks.
The playback phase can be adjusted by pressing the i or
j button while holding down the PLAY button.
REC INHIBIT lamp
This lights or goes off in accordance with the status of the
accidental erasure prevention tab on the cassette tape
and the setting which has been selected for F6 REC INH
on the <HOME> menu. Recording onto the tape is
inhibited while the lamp is lighted.
REW button
When this button is pressed, the tape is rewound.
The rewinding speed can be selected using setup menu
item No.102 (FF.REW MAX).
STOP button
When this button is pressed, the tape stops traveling, and
if TAPE is selected as the
Cassette tape’s
REC
accidental
erasure
REC INH
menu
INHIBIT
lamp
status
Description of
operation
F1
OUTPUT setting on the
prevention tab
status
setting
<HOME> menu, still pictures can be monitored.
Even in the stop mode, the drum continues to rotate, and
the tape remains tightly wound around the drum.
Therefore, when the VTR is left in the stop mode beyond
a specific period of time, it is automatically set to the
standby OFF mode in order to protect the tape. The VTR
is set to the stop mode immediately after the cassette has
been installed.
Lighted*
(or blinks
slowly).
Recording
disabled
All recording operations
are inhibited.
ー
All recording operations
are permitted.
All recording operations
are inhibited.
OFF
ALL
Off
Lighted
Recording operations
involving the overwriting
of existing material are
inhibited.
Normal recording
operations are inhibited.
Editing is possible.
Recording of video
signals and CTL signals
are inhibited.
Blinks
rapidly
PRE
FF button
Recording
enabled
When this button is pressed, the tape is fast forwarded.
The fast forwarding speed can be selected using setup
menu item No.102 (FF.REW MAX).
Blinks
rapidly
NORM
V/CTL
Blinks
rapidly
EDIT button
This button is pressed together with the PLAY button
during playback to initiate manual editing.
*
Whether the REC INHIBIT lamp is to light or blink is selected by
the No.114 REC INH LAMP setup menu item setting.
When the button is pressed in the stop mode, the input
signals in the mode selected by the <ASSEMBLE> menu
or <INSERT> menu can be monitored in the EE mode.
When the STOP button is pressed, the original picture
and sound are restored.
During playback, search, fast forwarding or rewinding, the
input signals in the mode selected by the <ASSEMBLE>
menu or <INSERT> menu can be monitored in the EE
mode while the button is held down.
<Note>
When SETUP MENU No. 18 (SP MODE INH) is set to
ON, data cannot be recorded onto a tape that was
formatted in any other format than DVCPRO HD-LP. If the
menu is set to OFF, data can be recorded.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
Front panel (7)
INPUT CHECK button
Only while this button is held down are the input signals
from the monitor output connector output to enable the
input video and audio signals to be monitored.
The time code generator can be checked on the time
code display.
Select LATCH as the setup menu item No.517 (TCG
OUT) setting in order to continue displaying the time code
generator value even after the INPUT CHECK button has
been released.
<Notes>
z The INPUT CHECK function does not work for the
CUE signal. Input signals can be monitored in the EE
mode.
z The monitor operation varies with the VIDEO/AUDIO
input selection. For details, refer to the INPUT
CHECK output specifications on pages 17 and 18.
STANDBY button
While the head drum is rotating, the button’s lamp lights
to indicate that the standby ON mode is now established.
The same tape tension is applied as in the regular stop
mode.
If the button is pressed in the stop mode, the standby
OFF mode is established followed by the half loading
mode. At this time, its lamp goes off.
When the VTR is left in the stop mode beyond a specific
period of time, it is automatically set to the standby OFF
mode in order to protect the tape.
In the standby OFF mode, if this button or the STOP
button is pressed, the VTR is set to the standby ON
mode. If a button other than the STOP button is pressed,
the VTR is set to the mode that corresponds to the button
pressed.
The time taken by the VTR to transfer to the standby OFF
mode can be selected using a setup menu item.
PLAYER and RECORDER buttons
These buttons are operated if the VTR is to be used as a
recorder to conduct editing operations with a VTR
equipped with an RS-422A serial interface remote control
connector (9 pins). Neither button works when the VTR is
used on its own.
PLAYER:
When this button is pressed, its lamp lights to
indicate that the player connected to the VTR can
be operated by remote control. The VTR’s editing
and tape transport system buttons can now be
used to control the player.
RECORDER:
When this button is pressed, its lamp lights to
indicate that the editing and tape transport
system buttons can now be used to operate the
recorder (this VTR).
z When the PLAYER button or RECORDER button is
pressed while ENA has been selected as the setup
menu item No.200 (PARA RUN) setting, the lamps of
both buttons light to indicate that the VTR now serves
as the master unit for parallel run operations.
However, when this setting is used, it is no longer
possible to perform external control from the
REMOTE connector (9 pins).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
Front panel (8)
INPUT CHECK output specifications
VIDEO
Input selection
(MENU 600)
INT SG
HD SDI
SD SDI
1394
Output system
MUTE
(BLACK)
HD SDI
(MONITOR)
INT SG*
INT SG*
HD SDI
1394*
1394*
MUTE
(BLACK)
SD SDI
(MONITOR)
SD SDI
SD SDI
LCD
(MONITOR)
INT SG* HD SDI*
1394*
1394*
VIDEO OUT3
INT SG* HD SDI* SD SDI*
* Only output from the internal signal processing circuit is delayed.
<Notes>
z Signals for INT SG input are selected in Menu No. 601.
z INPUT CHECK is disabled when 23/24 Hz mode or 25 Hz
(HD, SD) mode and 50 Hz (HD, SD) mode are selected.
z INPUT CHECK is disabled during tape playback when INT
SG or 1394 is selected.
z INPUT CHECK is disabled in VIDEO OUT3. It returns to
the normal output state.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
INPUT CHECK output specifications (continued)
AUDIO (EE mode)
MONITOR L/R and HEAD PHONE L/R interlock with the MONITOR SELECT button on the front panel.
AUDIO Input selection
VIDEO Input
INT SG
SDI
selection INT SG
HD SDI
SD SDI
1394
INT SG
HD SDI
SD SDI
1394
Output system
HD SDI (MONITOR)
INT SG*
INT SG*
INT SG*
INT SG
INT SG*
INT SG*
INT SG*
MUTE
INT SG*
INT SG
INT SG*
INT SG*
MUTE
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
HD SDI*
HD SDI*
HD SDI*
HD SDI*
HD SDI*
HD SDI*
HD SDI*
MUTE
HD SDI*
HD SDI*
HD SDI*
HD SDI*
MUTE
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
SD SDI (MONITOR)
MONITOR L
INT SG*
INT SG*
INT SG*
INT SG*
INT SG*
SD SDI*
SD SDI*
SD SDI*
SD SDI*
SD SDI*
MONITOR R
HEAD PHONE L
HEAD PHONE R
AUDIO Input selection
VIDEO Input
AES/EBU
ANALOG
selection INT SG
HD SDI
SD SDI
1394
INT SG
HD SDI
SD SDI
1394
Output system
HD SDI (MONITOR)
AES/EBU* AES/EBU*
AES/EBU* MUTE
AES/EBU* AES/EBU* AES/EBU*
AES/EBU* AES/EBU* AES/EBU*
AES/EBU* AES/EBU* AES/EBU*
AES/EBU* AES/EBU* AES/EBU*
MUTE
AES/EBU*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
ANALOG* ANALOG*
ANALOG* MUTE
ANALOG* ANALOG* ANALOG*
ANALOG* ANALOG* ANALOG*
ANALOG* ANALOG* ANALOG*
ANALOG* ANALOG* ANALOG*
MUTE
ANALOG*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
1394*
SD SDI (MONITOR)
MONITOR L
MONITOR R
HEAD PHONE L
HEAD PHONE R
* Only output from the internal signal processing circuit is delayed.
AUDIO (Tape mode)
MONITOR L/R and HEAD PHONE L/R interlock with the MONITOR SELECT button on the front panel.
AUDIO Input selection
VIDEO Input
INT SG
SDI
selection INT SG
HD SDI
SD SDI
1394
INT SG
HD SDI
SD SDI
1394
Output system
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
TAPE*2
MUTE
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
HD SDI*1
HD SDI*1
HD SDI*1
HD SDI*1
HD SDI*1
HD SDI*1
TAPE*2
MUTE
HD SDI*1
HD SDI*1
HD SDI*1
HD SDI*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
HD SDI (MONITOR)
MUTE
TAPE*2
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
INT SG*1
MUTE
TAPE*2
SD SDI*1
SD SDI*1
SD SDI*1
SD SDI*1
SD SDI (MONITOR)
MONITOR L
MONITOR R
HEAD PHONE L
HEAD PHONE R
AUDIO Input selection
VIDEO Input
AES/EBU
ANALOG
selection INT SG
HD SDI
SD SDI
1394
INT SG
HD SDI
SD SDI
1394
Output system
HD SDI (MONITOR)
SD SDI (MONITOR)
AES/EBU*1
AES/EBU*1
TAPE*2
MUTE
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
ANALOG*1
ANALOG*1
TAPE*2
MUTE
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
1394*1
MUTE
TAPE*2
MUTE
TAPE*2
AES/EBU*1 AES/EBU*1 AES/EBU*1
AES/EBU*1 AES/EBU*1 AES/EBU*1
AES/EBU*1 AES/EBU*1 AES/EBU*1
AES/EBU*1 AES/EBU*1 AES/EBU*1
ANALOG*1 ANALOG*1 ANALOG*1
ANALOG*1 ANALOG*1 ANALOG*1
ANALOG*1 ANALOG*1 ANALOG*1
ANALOG*1 ANALOG*1 ANALOG*1
MONITOR L
MONITOR R
HEAD PHONE L
HEAD PHONE R
*1 Only output from the internal signal processing circuit is delayed.
*2 The playback sounds from the same tape as the main line system are output.
<Notes>
z Noise may occur if VIDEO INPUT does not synchronize with OUTREF.
z Signals at the time when INT SG input is selected can be selected in Menu No. 761.
z INPUT CHECK is disabled while playing back a tape when INT SG or 1394 is selected.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
Rear panel
ANALOG AUDIO IN connectors
These are the analog audio input connectors (for CH1,
CH2, CH3 and CH4).
ANALOG AUDIO OUT connectors
These are the analog audio output connectors (for CH1,
CH2, CH3 and CH4).
HD SERIAL DIGITAL COMPONENT AUDIO
VIDEO IN/OUT connector/ACTIVE THRU
The HD digital component audio and video signals
complying with the SMPTE 292M, 296M and 299M
standards are input and output through this connector.
Signals with the time code, menu or other superimposed
information are output from the HD SDI MONITOR.
For INPUT CHECK, refer to the INPUT CHECK output
AC IN socket
Using the power cord supplied, connect one end to this
socket and the other end to the power outlet.
SIGNAL GND terminal
This is connected to the signal ground terminal on the
component connected to this VTR in order to minimize
noise. It is not a safety ground.
SD SERIAL DIGITAL COMPONENT AUDIO
VIDEO IN connector/ACTIVE THRU
This is an input connector for SD SDI signals that comply
with the SMPTE 259M-C, 272M-A, or ITU-R BT.656-4
standards. The SD SDI input acts as an up converter and
records data.
Fan
The fan is used to cool down the VTR.
When the fan stops due to an abnormal condition, the
warning symbol (W) is displayed on the time code display
section and a warning beep is sounded.
If the VTR is made to continue operating in the warning
status, the temperature inside the deck rises, and when it
exceeds the safety temperature, all the VTR’s operations
will be shut down.
SD SERIAL DIGITAL COMPONENT AUDIO
and VIDEO OUT connectors
The digital component audio and video signals complying with
the SMPTE 259M-C or 272M-A standard are output from
these connectors. Video signals are output during
DVCPRO50M/25M/DV/DVCAM compatible playback and
down-converting output. Video images are output from the SD
SDI MONITOR together with supers such as the TC/Menu.
Using setup menu item No.606 (SD MONI O SEL), it is also
possible to make the SD SDI MONITOR output the same
output as SD SDI OUT1 (no information superimposed).
TIME CODE IN connector
This connector is used to record an external time code
onto the tape.
TIME CODE OUT connector
During playback, the playback time code is output through
F1
When “SD SDI” has been selected as the
(VID IN) setting
on the <VIDEO> menu and “THRU” has been selected as the
No.107 (EE MODE SEL) setting, no information is
superimposed onto the SD SDI MONITOR output signals in
the EE mode, and the same output as SD SDI OUT1 is
delivered.
this connector.
During recording, the time code
generated by the internal time code generator is output.
CUE IN connector
The analog signals to be recorded on the CUE tracks are
input through this connector.
Audio signals from a microphone can also be recorded by
selecting the j60 dB input mode for setup menu item
No.704 (CUE IN LV).
z For INPUT CHECK, refer to the INPUT CHECK
are muted during cross conversion.
<Note>
In the 23/24 Hz mode, the system phase of the SD SDI
output and analog composite video output is subject to
change when the tape has been set to travel at the
normal speed (1k) so that the HD SDI output and phase
will be aligned.
CUE OUT connector
The analog signals recorded on the CUE tracks are
output through this connector.
MONITOR OUT connectors
The CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7 and CH8
PCM audio signals or CUE signals are output through
these connectors.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts and their functions (continued)
Rear panel (continued)
z During SLOW/STILL playback, unprocessed video and
audio signals are output as the IEEE1394 digital interface
output. When these video and audio signals are monitored
using another device, they may differ from the video and
audio signals played back by this unit. When the equipment
for non-linear editing is connected to this unit, do not start
any other application program than software for the non-
linear edit. Non-linear editing equipment may garble the
output video picture.
Be absolutely sure to bear the following points in mind
when connecting the IEEE1394 cable.
z Ensure that the unit and all of the connected devices are
each grounded (or connected to a common ground) before
use. If it is not possible to ground the unit and devices, turn
off the power of the unit and of all the connected devices
before connecting or disconnecting the IEEE1394 cable.
z When the unit is to be connected to a device equipped with a
4-pin type of connector, connect the unit’s connector (6-pin
type) first.
ANALOG COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT connectors
The analog composite video signals are output through
these connectors. They are output during DVCPRO50M,
25M, DV or DVCAM interchangeable playback or when
signals are down-converted and output.
z When connecting the unit with a PC equipped with a 6-pin
type of connector, connect the 1394 cable as dictated by the
shapes of the IEEE1394 connectors. Bear in mind that
inserting a plug the wrong way round may damage the unit.
Video signals containing superimposed information can
be output through the VIDEO OUT 3 connector. Whether
the superimposing is to be set ON or OFF is selected
using the setup menu item No.005 (SUPER).
Right
HD/SD REF IN connector and 75
h
terminal switch
These are the input connectors for the HD/SD reference
video signals and the loop-through output connector. To
terminate signals, turn the switch [ON].
IEEE1394
connector
END of IEEE1394
cable
<Notes>
z To use the connector as the HD reference, input the positive-
negative bipolar three-value synchronization signal. Input
signals that conform to the input signal or the tape format.
z To use the connector as the SD reference, input black burst
signals must comply with SMPTE170M and ITU624-4.
Wrong
IEEE1394 digital input/output
The IEEE1394 digital interface is available for input and output.
Use a 6-pin type connector. Bus power is not supported.
IEEE1394
connector
END of IEEE1394
cable
<Notes>
DIGITAL AUDIO IN and OUT connectors
These are the input and output connectors of the digital
audio signals that comply with the AES/EBU standards.
z Ensure that the connections with other devices are made on
a 1:1 basis.
z When an IEEE1394 cable has been connected to the
IEEE1394 digital input/output connector, do not apply any
strong external force as this may damage the connector.
Remote control connectors
The unit can be operated externally by connecting two
units or an external controller to one unit.
Two remote control connectors are provided: one for IN/
OUT uses and the other for OUT uses only.
IN/OUT: For connection with an external controller
For connection during deck-to-deck operations
OUT: For connection during parallel run operations
For loop-through uses
z
When error code E-92 (1394 INITIAL ERROR) appears,
disconnect the connecting cables and re-connect them or turn
off the unit’s power and turn it back on.
z The AV signals may be disrupted when the power of the
connected devices is turned on or off and when the 1394
cable is connected or disconnected.
z When the input signals are switched or the mode is
transferred, it may take a few seconds for the system to
stabilize. Proceed with the recording operation only after the
system has stabilized.
ENCODER REMOTE connector
z The following situation applies when recording is to be
performed by selecting the IEEE1394 digital interface input,
and it applies with the signals which are output by the
IEEE1394 digital interface.
Š When playback signals other than regular 1a speed
playback signals have been input, no guarantees are made
for the pictures and sound which will be recorded or for the
EE-type pictures and sound.
z The following situation applies when the video input
selection has been set as the IEEE1394 digital interface.
Š The SDI signals, the analog video output signals and time
code output signals become irregular in the EE mode. Do
not use these signals for recording purposes. (The teletext
signals and other signals superimposed onto the video
output signals also become irregular.)
An external encoder remote controller is connected to this
connector when the video output signal settings are to be
adjusted from an external component.
RS-232C connector
Data communication is available by connecting the unit to
a personal computer.
PARALLEL REMOTE connector
The unit can be operated externally with the 50-pin
parallel remote.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Example of connections performed for
one VTR
Example of connections performed for
two VTRs (deck-to-deck)
Set the REMOTE LED
on the front panel to the
Source side:
Press the “9P 1394” REMOTE button on the front panel
for 2 or more seconds to set the VTR to the REMOTE
status. (The LED lights.)
off status (LOCAL mode).
SD SDI input ACTIVE THRU
Recorder side:
Set the REMOTE LED
on the front panel to the off
status (LOCAL mode).
SD SDI input
(audio, video)
SD reference signal generator
To audio monitor
component
HD SDI input
(audio, video)
HD SDI signal
Source side
HD SDI output
(ACTIVE THRU)
SD SDI output
HD SDI outputs
Digital audio inputs
Audio monitor outputs
Digital audio outputs
To video monitor
component
REMOTE
IN/OUT
75
h
termination
OFF
Remote
signal (9P)
To audio monitor
component
Recorder side
HD/SD reference inputs
(loop-through output)
Video monitor output
(3 composite output lines)
Analog audio outputs
To video monitor
component
REMOTE
IN/OUT
75
h
Analog audio inputs
termination
ON
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections (continued)
Example of connections in 23/24 Hz or 25/ Example of connections in 25/50 Hz (SD)
50 Hz (HD) mode
mode
When a tape recorded with a frame rate of 24 fps (25/50 fps)
using a variable frame rate camera is played back on the
unit, data can be converted and output in 1080/24 psf (1080/
25 psf or 1080/50i) and recorded on the AJ-HD3700 series.
Shown in the figure below is an example of the deck-to-deck
connections.
When a tape recorded with a frame rate of 25/50 fps using a
variable frame rate camera is played back on the unit, data
can be converted and output in 576/50i and recorded in the
SD-VTR. An example of a connection between decks is
shown in the following illustration.
Input the 50 Hz reference signal to the SD REF input
connector as the REF input.
Input the 48 Hz (or 50 Hz) reference signal as the REF input.
HD SDI OUT
AJ-HD1800
(Source side)
SD SDI OUT
AJ-HD1800
SD SDI signal
(Source side)
REMOTE
IN/OUT
75h
termination
OFF
Reference signal
For 24 Hz mode:
HD REF 48 Hz (Interlace)
For 25 Hz (HD)/50 Hz (HD) mode:
HD REF 50 Hz (Interlace) or
SD REF 50 Hz (Interlace)
REMOTE
IN/OUT
Reference signal
SD REF 50Hz
(interlace)
75
h
termination
OFF
Remote
signal
(9P)
HD SDI signal
75h
termination
ON
HD SDI IN
REMOTE
IN/OUT
AJ-HD3700B
(Recorder side)
Remote
signal (9P)
AJ-SD965
SD
SDI IN
(Recorder side)
REF IN
HD
VIDEO OUT
WFM
SD SDI
HD SDI
O1UT
1
2
3
IN
OUT1
IN
OUT
SD
ON
3
~AC IN
FUSE
AES/EBU
ANALOG
REMOTE
ANALOG
125V 5A
ON
CH1/2
(
)
VIDEO
IN
SUPER
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
75ꢀ
75ꢀ
IN
SDI
OUT
THROUGH
THROUGH
O2UT
IN
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
AC IN
INPUT
OUT2
OFF
OFF
REMOTE IN/OUT
TC
CH1
CH3
CH1
CH3
AUDIO
IN
CH2
CH4
CH2
CH4
ON
IN
Y
P
75?
SD
CH3/4
IN
MONITOR
(
)
1
2
SUPER
OFF
SPARE
MONITOR
HD
SD
CH
CH
OUTPUT
REMOTE
OUT
ACTIVE
THROUGH
TC
PUSH
B
OUT
CH1/2
OUT
REF VIDEO
IN
(
)
SUPER
REF OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO
ENCODER REMOTE
RS-232C
ON
P
75?
R
CH3/4
OUT
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
OUT
REMOTE
IN/OUT
V/A
RS-232C
3
CONTROL
OPTION
OFF
(SUPER)
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
AUDIO
OUT
MON
L
PARALLEL
IN/OUT
(
)
50P
CONTROL
PANEL
OPTION
SDTI
Y
1
VIDEO
OUT
IN
OUT
PARALLEL
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
MON
R
1
2
AUDIO IN
CH
TIME CODE
2
P
B
(WFM)
CH
1
CH
2
3
CH
4
CH
5
IN
UT
PUSH
3
P
R
(SUPER)
SIGNAL
GND
AUDIO OUT
H
MONITOR
PUSH
H
PUSH
1
H
PUSH
2
3
H
PUSH
4
UE
PUSH
PUSH
PUSH
SIGNAL
GND
SERVICE ONLY
75
h
REMOTE
IN/OUT
termination
ON
Video monitor
Video monitor
<Notes>
Note concerning tapes played back by this VTR
z Use tapes which have been shot by a variable frame rate
camera.
z Do not use tapes which are copies of shot tapes or
edited tapes. Doing so will cause the tape management
information to be lost, and normal conversion and
playback may not be possible as a result.
z To convert a tape recorded at frame rates other than 24
fps (25/50 fps) into 1080/24 psf (1080/25 psf or 1080/
50i), use the frame rate converter (optional AJ-FRC27).
z When the tape begins to travel at 1k speed, the video
may be disturbed and the audio muted for several frames
in order to synchronize the REF input with the tape.
z VITC signals are not output to the SD SDI and VIDEO
OUT connectors in the 23/24 Hz mode.
z In the 25/50 (HD) Hz mode, the output video signals of the
SD SDI and VIDEO OUT connectors are delayed by
approximately 1 field in relation to the HD SDI output.
z HD SDI output is muted in the 25/50 Hz (SD) mode.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections (continued)
Example of connections with an editing controller
Recorder
AV monitor
Video monitor
signals
Audio monitor
signals
To REMOTE IN/OUT
Av monitor
Reference signal
Remote signals
Editing controller
Referencesignal
generator
AV switcher
To
REMOTE
IN/OUT
To REMOTE
IN/OUT
Reference signal
Source unit
Source unit
Av monitor
Av monitor
<Note>
When disconnecting the remote signals (9P) from one component and re-connecting them to another component,
check the settings, etc. of the editing controller.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Concerning tapes
Consumer-use DV and DVCAM cassettes
(Standard DV and DVCAM cassettes, mini DV and
DVCAM cassettes)
Use a cassette adapter (AJ-CS455P) when a mini DV or
DVCAM cassette is to be used.
Note that inserting a mini DV or DVCAM cassette without the
use of a cassette adapter will cause malfunctioning.
Also note that long-duration mini DV cassettes (80 minutes
in the standard mode and 120 minutes in the LP mode)
cannot be used.
<Precautions when playing back consumer-use
DV and DVCAM tapes>
z It is not possible to play back consumer-use tapes which
have been recorded in the LP mode.
z The maximum transport speed of a consumer-use DV or
DVCAM cassette tape is 32k.
M cassette size
L cassette size
z The maximum still time for a consumer-use DV or
DVCAM cassette tape is 10 seconds.
z From the perspective of protecting consumer-use DV
and DVCAM cassette tapes, minimize the number of
times the tapes are cued up at the same place as far as
possible.
XL cassette size
z When consumer-use DV and DVCAM cassette tapes are
used, the maximum time for STILL TIMER is set to 10
seconds and the total time elapsing when the VTR is left
standing in the STILL mode (When the STEP FWD
mode is selected) is set to 1 minute.
z When editing material which has been recorded onto a
consumer-use DV or DVCAM cassette tape, first record
the material onto a DVCPRO HD tape or another VTR
used for broadcasting applications.
Align the cassette with the center of the insertion slot, and
push it in gently.
The cassette tape will be loaded automatically.
<Notes on cassette insertion>
z Set the cassette level with the cassette slit and insert
straight.
z Do not put your hand in the cassette slit.
z Insert an M/L-cassette between the left/right M/L-
cassette guides.
z If the cassette slit is exposed to the strong direct rays of
the sun, a malfunction in the tape travel may occur.
z Noise may occur when performing slow playback using
consumer-use DV or DVCAM cassette tapes.
It is recommended that tapes bearing the Panasonic
brand be used as the consumer-use DV tapes.
M cassettes
Tapes capable of up to 33 minutes of recording or playback
(AJ-HP33EMG: for AJ-HD1800E)
L cassettes
Tapes capable of up to 64 minutes of recording or playback
(AJ-HP64ELG)
XL cassettes
Tapes capable of up to 126 minutes of recording and
playback
（AJ-HP126EXG）
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning on the power and inserting the
cassette
Before starting to operate the VTR, check whether the
equipment has been connected properly.
2
1
3
1 Turn on the VTR’s power.
2 Check that the AUTO OFF lamp is off.
If condensation or some other problem has occurred, the
AUTO OFF lamp lights, and no further operations can be
performed.
3 Insert the cassette tape.
Without forcing it, insert the cassette tape at the
prescribed position.
4
4 Check that the STOP lamp is lighted.
When the tape is inserted, the cylinder starts rotating
automatically, the tape is loaded, and the VTR is set to
the STOP mode. The EJECT lamp goes off.
STOP and STANDBY modes
1 The VTR is set to the STOP mode when its STOP button
is pressed.
2
The STOP lamp lights, and the tape stops running.
z In order to protect the tape, the VTR is set to standby
OFF after the time set by setup menu item No.400
(STILL TIMER) has elapsed. If the STOP, REW, FF or
PLAY button is now pressed, the VTR will be set to the
corresponding mode.
2 The VTR is set to the STANDBY ON/OFF mode when its
STAND BY button is pressed.
The standby ON mode is established while the button’s
lamp is lighted. When the button is pressed in the
standby OFF mode, the VTR is set to the standby ON
mode.
1
When the button is pressed while the VTR is in the STOP
mode, it is set to the standby OFF mode and the half-
loading status, and the button’s lamp goes off.
<Precautions for STILL TIMER setting>
The cumulative total standby time at the same place
increases when programs are transmitted or the same
material is used repeatedly. In order to protect the tape,
keep the standby time at the same place on the tape as
short as possible by, for instance, selecting a maximum of 30
seconds or so as the setup menu item No.400 (STILL
TIMER) setting.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
1 Set the accidental erasure prevention tab on the cassette
tape to the “REC” position, and insert the tape.
2 Press the STOP button to set the VTR to the stop mode.
3 Select “EE” as the OUTPUT setting using F1 on the
<HOME> menu. EE pictures now appear on the TV
monitor.
4 Check that the REC INHIBIT lamp is off.
If the lamp is lighted, select “OFF” as the R INH setting
using F6 on the <HOME> menu.
If the inserted cassette has been formatted in a format
other than DVCPRO HD-LP, recording is prohibited by
default (factory settings) as set in SETUP MENU No. 118
(SP MODE INH).
5 Select the video and audio input signals, and adjust the
audio levels.
Selecting the video and audio input signals
1 Connect the signals to be recorded.
F1
2 Select the input signals using
on the <VIDEO>
F6
on the <AUDIO> menu or
F1
menu and
to
<AUDIO SHIFT1> menu
Adjust the audio levels
1 Adjust the audio input levels of the CH1, CH2, CH3,
CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7, CH8 audio signals and analog
cue signal selected on the AUDIO menu.
When the audio UNITY lamp on the front panel is
lighted, the audio signals will be recorded at the
appropriate levels.
2 Before adjusting the recording level, check that the
REC LED is lighted and that the audio adjustment dial
is in the unlocked status (LOCK LED off).
If the dial is in the LOCK status (LOCK LED lighted),
press it. The LOCK LED goes off, and the lock is
released.
In addition, the analog cue audio recording level is
adjusted using setup menu item No.790 (CUE REC
VOL) so that it will not exceed j20 dB.
6 Press the PLAY button while holding down the REC but-
ton.
The REC and PLAY lamps light, and recording starts.
7 When the STOP button is pressed, the recording ends,
and the VTR is set to the stop mode.
<Notes>
z During recording, check that the SERVO lamp is lighted.
The playback pictures will be disturbed if it is blinking or
off.
z If analog signals (ANA1 to ANA4) have been selected as
the CH5 to CH8 input signals on the AUDIO menu, their
recording levels are tied in with the recording levels which
have been set for the CH1 to CH4 signals.
z The audio playback level of 1394 output cannot be
adjusted.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
1 Insert the cassette tape, and set the VTR to the STOP
Playback phase adjustment function
mode.
If two VTRs are to be used to play the same program, the
playback phase between the VTRs can be adjusted by
changing the playback speed of one of the VTRs.
2 Press the PLAY button.
Normal playback commences.
3 Adjust the audio playback levels.
1 Press the TRIM button (“i” or “j” button) while holding
down the PLAY button. Each time it is pressed, the play-
back speed is accelerated or decelerated in increments
of the number of playback framing fields selected by the
setup menu item No.109 (CAP.LOCK) setting.
Before adjusting the playback levels, check that the PB
LED is lighted and that the audio adjustment dial is in the
unlocked status. If the dial is locked (indicated by the
lighted LOCK LED), press it. The LOCK LED goes off,
and the lock is released. The analog cue audio level is
adjusted using setup menu item No.791 (CUE PB VOL).
Normally, the VTR is kept in the UNITY status (the
segment display of the control lights at the center).
The SERVO lamp remains off while the tape is being
played at the accelerated or decelerated speed.
2 Upon completion of the playback phase adjustment,
release the PLAY button.
4 To end the playback, press the STOP button. The VTR is
The VTRs now return to the standard playback speed,
and the SERVO lamp lights.
now set to the STOP mode.
<Notes>
z During playback, check that the SERVO lamp is lighted.
The playback pictures will be disturbed if the lamp is off or
blinking.
z The audio playback level of 1394 output cannot be
adjusted.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Jog/Shuttle
Shuttle Mode
Jog Mode
1 Press the search dial to return the pressed dial to the
original position.
1 Push in the search dial.
Confirm that the JOG lamp lights.
The SHTL lamp lights, and the mode becomes the
shuttle mode.
z Immediately after turning on the power, turn the search
dial to the center position.
2 Turn the search dial.
The dial’s click-stops are released, and the tape is played
back at the speed corresponding to the speed at which
the dial is turned.
2 Press the SHTL/SLOW button to shift to [SHTL] or
The maximum jog speed can be changed by selecting
the setup menu item No.310 (JOG FWD MAX) and
No.311 (JOG REV MAX) settings.
[SLOW].
3 Turn the search dial.
When the dial is no longer turned, a still picture will
appear.
z When the lamp lights for [SHTL] of JOG/SHTL/SLOW,
the playback rate will vary within the range from 0 to +/
-32 times. The range can be changed to +/-9.8, +/-16,
and +/-32 times in SETUP MENU No. 101 (SHTL
MAX). When the dial is at the center position, images
become still pictures.
3 To transfer the VTR from the jog mode to another mode,
press the button that corresponds to the mode con-
cerned.
z When the lamp lights for [SLOW] of JOG/SHTL/SLOW,
the playback rate will vary within the range from -4.9 to
+4.9 times. The maximum rate can be switched in
SETUP MENU No. 308 (VAR FWD MAX) and No. 309
(VAR REV MAX). However, noise may be generated
unless the rate is set within the range from -1.0 to +2.0
times. For recording tapes other than the DVCPRO
HD-LP recording tape, noise may be generated unless
the rate is set within the range from -1.0 to +1.1 times.
When the dial is at the center position, images become
still pictures.
<Note>
The default setting for the search dial is the direct search
mode for moving to the shuttle mode/jog mode/variable
mode.
It is possible to set the mode to the search mode only when
the search button is pressed by changing the setting in
SETUP MENU No. 100 (SEARCH ENA) to [KEY].
4 To move from the Shuttle mode to other modes, press
the STOP button or other buttons.
<Notes>
z From the audio monitor output, audio can be played back
when the rate is within the range from -32 to +32 times.
However, you must select [PCM] in SETUP MENU No.
746 (MONI CH SEL).
z Audio playback in search mode may contain some noise.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Editing
1 Select the editing mode.
ASSEM button:
3 Press the PLAY button.
Assemble (frame-to-frame continuity) editing is
performed using this button.
INSERT button:
4 While monitoring the TV monitor, search the position
where the editing is to be started (IN point), and press
the PLAY and EDIT buttons together at this position.
Insert editing is performed using this button.
5 Similarly, while monitoring the TV monitor, search the
position where the editing is to be terminated (OUT
point), and press the PLAY or STOP button at this posi-
tion. The VTR is set to the PLAY or STOP mode, and the
editing is terminated.
2 On the time code display, select the channels to be
edited.
ASSEM:
F1
Set ASSEM to ON using the
button.
INSERT：
To select V, A1, A2, A3, A4 and CUE channels, press
the F1 to F6 buttons; to select A5, A6, A7, A8 and
SHIFT
F2
SHIFT
F6
TC channels, press the
+
to
+
buttons. The highlighted channels will now be edited.
Preroll
Press the PREROLL button.
The VTR now performs the preroll operation.
When the cue time has been registered on the HOME, PF1
or PF2 screen:
The tape is prerolled from the registered cue time using
F1
the preroll time which was set using
<HOME SHIFT> menu.
(PREROL) on the
When the search mode is established on the CUE screen:
The tape is prerolled from the selected cue point using
the preroll time which was set using F5 (CU-ROL) on the
<CUE SHIFT> menu.
The preroll operation is not performed when the selected
cue point has not been registered or when the cue point
registration mode is established.
In all other situations:
The tape is prerolled from the registered IN point (or the
current tape position when the IN point has not been
F1
registered) using the preroll time which was set using
(PREROL) on the <HOME SHIFT> menu.
If the PREROLL button is pressed when the IN point has
not been registered, the current tape position is
automatically registered as the IN point [but only when
ENA has been selected as the setup menu item No.305
(AUTO ENTRY) setting].
<Note>
The time code or CTL signal must be continuously recorded
between the edit IN point and preroll point.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Editing
(deck-to-deck)
“Editing” refers to the work involved in using pre-recorded
tapes to bring different contents together or delete
unnecessary parts and bring together only the necessary
parts.
Switch settings and adjustments
When using this VTR as the recorder
Set the VTR to the LOCAL status
(which is indicated when the REMOTE
LED is OFF).
The basic editing steps are as follows.
1 Using the REMOTE button, set the player to REMOTE
and the recorder to LOCAL (ensure that the REMOTE
LED is not lighted).
Set the POWER
switch to ON.
2 Select the editing mode (ASSEM or INSERT).
3 Register the edit points of the recorder and player.
4 Check and modify, if necessary, the edit points.
5 Preview the material before editing it.
6 Proceed with the editing (AUTO EDIT).
7 Review the edited results.
Adjust the recording
levels.
Switch the time counter display to TC
or CTL.
When using this VTR as the player
Press the 9P button for 2 or more
seconds to set the VTR to the REMOTE
status which is indicated when the
REMOTE LED is ON.
Set the POWER
switch to ON.
Adjust the playback
levels.
Switch the time counter display to TC
or CTL.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck) (continued)
Selecting the editing mode
Registering the edit points
1 Select the editing mode.
1 Locate the edit IN point by performing the jog or shuttle
operation. Set the tape to the still picture status at the
desired position.
ASSEM button:
Assemble (frame-to-frame continuity) editing is
performed in this mode.
INSERT button:
For a detailed description of the jog and shuttle
Insert editing is performed in this mode.
2 Press the IN button and SET button together.
The edit IN point is now registered.
2 On the time code display, select the channels to be
The edit IN point value appears on the display.
edited.
ASSEM：
3 Locate the edit OUT point by performing the jog or
shuttle operation.
Set ASSEM to ON using the F1 button.
INSERT：
Set the tape to the still picture status at the desired
position.
To select V, A1, A2, A3, A4 and CUE channels, press
F1
F6
buttons; to select A5, A6, A7, A8 and
the
to
SHIFT
F2
SHIFT
F6
TC channels, press the
+
to
+
4 Press the OUT button and SET button together.
The edit OUT point is now registered.
buttons. The highlighted channels will now be edited.
The edit OUT point value appears on the display.
3 Press the PLAYER or RECORDER button to select the
VTR which is to be operated. (Settings when two VTR
units are connected.)
5 The edit points can be registered directly using the
number keys.
PLAYER：
1. Select the <ASSEMBLE> or <INSERT> menu.
Press this button if the player VTR is to be operated to
register the edit points.
T
2. Press the
button to highlight the edit point. Turn
the ADJUST dial to move the highlighting to the IN
point or OUT point.
RECORDER：
Press this button if the recorder VTR (this VTR) is to
be operated to register the edit points.
T
3. Press the
button again, and input the desired edit
point directly using the number keys. Turn the
ADJUST dial to move from one digit to the next.
[ASSEM screen]
ENT
4. Press the
button to register the point.
IN point
OUT point
C
To abort the registration at any time, press the
button.
To reset a particular edit point (to 00:00:00:00), press
T
the
button, align the highlighting with the edit point
concerned, and press the button again.butt
F
0
Next, press the
button and
ENT
button together.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Finally, press the
button to register the point.
[INSERT screen]
Marker
OUT point
IN point
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
AUDIO IN point
AUDIO OUT point
2, 4
1, 3
5
Match frame processing function
When two VTRs are used to perform the editing
operations, there will be a total of 4 edit points: the IN and
OUT points for the player and the IN and OUT points for
the recorder. However, the last point is automatically
calculated so only three of the edit points need to be
registered.
Negative duration function
Use setup menu items No.300 (IN/OUT DEL) and No.301
(NEGA FLASH) in combination.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck) (continued)
Checking the edit points
Modifying edit points
1 Press the IN (or OUT) button to check the edit point.
The value of the registered edit point appears on the
display.
1 Re-registering an edit point
Locate the new edit point by performing the jog or shuttle
operation, and press the IN (or OUT) button and SET
button at the same time to re-register the edit point.
2 While holding down the IN (or OUT) button, press the
PREROLL button to check the picture at the edit point.
The tape is cued up to the edit IN (or OUT) point, and a
still picture of the point appears.
2 Modifying an edit point in 1-frame increments (trimming
function)
Press the TRIM button while holding down the IN (or
OUT) button.
Each time the i button is pressed, the point is moved
ahead by one frame.
Conversely, each time the j button is pressed, the point
is moved back by one frame.
z If “STOP” has been selected as the setup menu item
No.307 (AFTER CUE-UP) setting, the VTR is set to the
EE mode provided that EE has been selected as the
F1
<HOME> menu
(OUTPUT) setting.
3 By holding down the IN and OUT buttons at the same
time, check the editing duration. The duration appears
on the display.
3 Resetting edit points
1 Resetting both an edit IN point and OUT point
F4
Press
menu.
(TC CLR = RESET) on the <HOME>
How the duration is calculated
z When two edit points have been set
The duration between the two points is calculated.
z When only one edit point has been set
The duration between the data which has been set
and the current address is calculated.
z When no edit points have been set
The duration of the previously edited section is
calculated.
(This takes effect only in the CTL mode.)
2 Resetting either an edit IN point or OUT point
C
Press the
button among the number keys while
holding down the IN (or OUT) button.
<Notes>
z An edit OUT point can be reset even while editing is in
progress.
z In the eject mode, the IN and OUT points are
automatically reset.
3ꢁ
2 1, 3
3
ꢀ
2
1
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck) (continued)
Previewing
<Note>
The registered points are automatically cleared after
editing has been executed. However, the previous edit
points can be recalled by pressing the TRIMi (or
TRIMj) button and SET button at the same time.
1 After the edit points have been registered, press the
PREVIEW button.
Regular preview is now conducted.
<Notes>
z If the edit IN point has not been registered, the position
where the PREVIEW button was pressed is registered
as the edit IN point.
z To stop the preview at any time, press the STOP but-
ton.
z When the PREVIEW button is pressed again after the
IN point during the course of a preview, the preview will
start again from the beginning.
z When the edit OUT point is reached, the tape is pos-
trolled, after which it stops automatically.
1
Reviewing
1 Upon completion of the editing, press the REVIEW
button.
Review is now started by the recorder.
z To stop the review at any time, press the STOP button.
z When the edit OUT point is reached, the tape is
postrolled, after which it stops.
1
Automatic editing
1 Press the AUTO EDIT button.
Automatic editing is now executed.
z To suspend editing at any time, press the STOP
button.
z When the edit OUT point is reached, the tape is
postrolled, after which it stops.
1
Postrolling
In the case of assemble editing, editing continues for
about 2 seconds after the edit OUT point is passed, and
the tape is then returned to the OUT point, after which it
stops.
In the case of insert editing, the PLAY mode is
established after the edit OUT point has been passed,
and the tape is then returned to the OUT point, after
which it stops.
Retry function
Even when the STOP button has been pressed to
suspend editing, editing can be repeated from the
beginning simply by pressing the AUTO EDIT button
again.
Auto tag function
If, upon completion of editing, when the AUTO EDIT
button is pressed although the next edit point has not yet
been registered, the previous edit OUT point is
registered as the IN point, and editing is executed.
To release the auto tag mode, press one of the transport
system buttons (such as the PLAY button).
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Split Editing
The video edit points and audio edit points can be registered
independently, and editing can be executed with the video
points offset from the audio points.
Audio edit points cannot be registered when the assemble
editing mode has been selected.
After registering the edit points, proceed with the same
operations as for insert editing.
A-IN button A-OUT button
_Registering the edit points
_Modifying the edit points
Video IN point:
Video IN point:
While holding down the IN button, press the SET but-
While holding down the IN button, press the TRIMi
ton.
button or TRIMj button.
Video OUT point:
Video OUT point:
While holding down the OUT button, press the SET but-
While holding down the OUT button, press the TRIMi
ton.
button or TRIMj button.
Audio IN point:
Audio IN point:
While holding down the A-IN button, press the SET but-
While holding down the A-IN button, press the TRIMi
ton.
button or TRIMj button.
Audio OUT point:
Audio OUT point:
While holding down the A-OUT button, press the SET
While holding down the A-OUT button, press the
button.
TRIMi button or TRIMj button.
<Note>
If the editing mode is changed to assemble editing after
the audio edit points have been registered, the audio edit
points will be cleared.
_Cueing the tape up to the edit points
Cue-up to video IN point:
While holding down the IN button, press the PREROLL
button.
Cue-up to video OUT point:
While holding down the OUT button, press the
PREROLL button.
Cue-up to audio IN point:
While holding down the A-IN button, press the
_Clearing the edit points
Video IN point:
While holding down the IN button, press the
button among the number keys.
Video OUT point:
C
PREROLL button.
C
While holding down the OUT button, press the
Cue-up to audio OUT point:
While holding down the A-OUT button, press the
PREROLL button.
button among the number keys.
Audio IN point:
While holding down the A-IN button, press the
C
button among the number keys.
Audio OUT point:
While holding down the A-OUT button, press the
C
button among the number keys.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Split Editing (continued)
_Duration display
The duration can be indicated on the display.
Between the video IN and OUT points:
Press the IN button and OUT button at the same time.
Between the audio IN and OUT points:
Press the A-IN button and A-OUT button at the same
time.
Match frame processing function
When two VTRs are used to perform the audio split
editing operations, there will be a total of 8 edit points: the
video IN and OUT points for the player, the video IN and
OUT points for the recorder, the audio IN and OUT points
for the player, and the audio IN and OUT points for the
recorder.
When five of the eight edit points are registered, the
remaining three points are automatically calculated so
only five of the edit points can be registered.
_When a VTR not equipped with the split
editing function is used as the player
When a VTR for which the video and audio edit points
cannot be set independently is used as the player, split
editing is still possible by setting the audio IN point and
OUT point in the recorder and setting the data of three
points as the video edit points.
<Note>
If, during audio split editing, the video OUT point (or audio
OUT point) only is registered without the audio OUT (or
video OUT point) having been registered and automatic
editing is then executed, editing will continue until either
the audio OUT point (or video OUT point) is registered or
the STOP button is pressed to suspend the editing
operation.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Variable memory function
Variable memory function selection
Variable memory playback operation
procedure
The variable memory mode can be selected by setting F6
(VARMEM) on the <HOME SHIFT> menu to “ON.”
2
F6
When
(VARMEM) is set to “OFF,” the variable memory
mode is canceled, and the regular mode is established.
<Note>
Bear in mind that when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD), 50
Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected as the system menu
F6
item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting,
(VARMEM) will no
longer appear on the display and the variable memory mode
cannot be selected.
Outline
1
This VTR is provided with two variable memory functions,
as follows. These functions can be used in the variable
memory mode.
5
4
6
3
To perform variable memory playback operations, set the
VTR to the variable memory mode, and take the steps
below.
Variable memory playback:
Any section of the tape can be played back at variable
speeds in the VAR mode, the changes in the speed can
be stored in the memory, and the tape can be played back
at the memorized speed.
1 Register the IN point using the SET button and IN button.
There is no need to set the OUT point for variable
memory playback.
Variable memory editing:
Using the VTR as a controller (recorder in the deck-to-
deck mode) to control the playback speed of the player,
editing can be performed in the variable speed mode.
2 Set the initial speed (j1.0k to i2.0k) using the search
dial while holding down the SET button.
3 When the SET button and PREVIEW/REVIEW button
are pressed at the same time, the tape is automatically
prerolled and played back at the initial speed setting up
to the IN point.
4 After the tape has passed the IN point, turn the search
dial to store the playback speed in the memory.
5 Press the STOP button to stop the tape.
6 When the PREVIEW/REVIEW button is pressed,
variable memory playback is performed at the
memorized speed.
<Notes>
z After passing the IN point, the tape is played back in
accordance with the settings in the memory, and it
continues to run at the last speed stored in the memory
until the STOP button is pressed.
z Whatever is stored in the memory will be cleared when the
VTR exits the variable memory mode. It is also cleared
when the POWER switch is set to “OFF.”
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Variable memory function (continued)
Variable memory editing operation procedure
9
4
6
5
1
8
2
3
To perform variable memory editing operations, set this VTR,
which is connected as the recorder to the variable memory
mode, and take the steps below.
<Notes>
z Whatever is stored in the memory will be cleared when the
VTR exits the variable memory mode. It is also cleared
when the POWER switch is set to “OFF.”
z Phase synchronization is not performed during playback
up to the IN point of the variable memory editing.
Therefore, depending on the VTR used as the player and
its speed setting, no guarantees are made for the
accuracy of the IN point.
1 Select the editing mode on the <ASSEMBLE> or
<INSERT> menu.
2 Select the VTR to be operated by pressing the
RECORDER or PLAYER button.
z When conducting variable memory editing in the speed
range of j1.0k to i2.0k, use VTRs with which these
speeds are guaranteed for both the recorder and player.
3 Register the IN and OUT points using the SET button
and IN and OUT buttons. The player’s OUT point cannot
be registered.
4 Press the PLAYER button to select the player VTR, and
then set the initial speed using the search dial while
holding down the SET button.
5 When the SET button and PREVIEW/REVIEW button
are pressed at the same time, the tapes in both the
player and recorder are automatically prerolled, and the
player VTR plays back the tape at the initial speed
setting up to the IN point.
6 After the tape has passed the IN point, turn the search
dial to store the playback speed of the player VTR in the
memory.
7 When the tape passes the OUT point that was set by the
recorder, the storing of the playback speed in the
memory ends.
8 When the AUTO EDIT button is pressed, variable
memory editing is executed. Once editing has been
executed, the memorized speeds will be cleared except
for the initial speed which is not cleared.
9 By pressing the PREVIEW/REVIEW button, the edited
results can be checked.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus
The function menus are used to set the functions which are frequently used.
The function menus are selected directly using the direct menu buttons on the front panel.
General description
General menus
Special menus
<<SYSTEM MENU>>
<HOME>, <HOME SHIFT>
The SYSTEM menu is displayed on-screen, enabling
The most basic settings for recording, playback and TC
various adjustments to be made.
operations are set on these menu screens.
<VIDEO>, <VIDEO SHIFT>
<<SETUP MENU>>
The basic input/output settings for the video signals are
performed and, moreover, the level of the HD output
signals can also be adjusted on these menu screens.
The SETUP menu is displayed on-screen, enabling
various adjustments to be made.
<<FILE>>
<AUDIO>, <AUDIO SHIFT1>, <AUDIO SHIFT2>
The basic input/output settings for the audio signals are
performed on these menu screens.
The current setting information, including the SETUP
menu contents, can be provided with titles and either
saved in or loaded from the backup memory in one of 4
variations.
<TC>, <TC SHIFT>
The TC-related settings are performed on these menu
screens.
The settings for superimposing time codes on the display
can also be performed on these menu screens.
<<PF1 FT ASSIGN>>, <<PF1 BK ASSIGN>>
<<PF2 FT ASSIGN>>, <<PF2 BK ASSIGN>>
The SETUP menu items which can be registered are
displayed on-screen, and they can be registered into or
deleted from the function buttons.
<PF1 FT>, <PF1 BK>, <PF2 FT>, <PF2 BK>
Up to 24 frequently used menu items which have been
registered can be used on these menu screens.
<<IC CARD/MENU>>
Up to eight kinds of current settings, including the
contents of the SETUP menu with titles, can be stored or
retrieved from an SD memory card.
<CUE>, <CUE SHIFT>
A maximum of 60 cue points can be set on these menu
screens. In the PAGE mode, 10 pages with 6 cue points
on each page are provided so that the cue points can be
managed on a page-by-page basis.
<<IC CARD/ERR LOG>>
Up to eight kinds of the error logs with titles can be stored
or retrieved from an SD memory card.
<DIAG>, <DIAG SHIFT>
<<IC CARD/MULT CUE>>
Information such as Warnings/Hour meter/UMID can be
Up to eight kinds of MULTI CUE menus with titles can be
confirmed.
stored or retrieved from an SD memory card.
On the SHIFT window, error log files can be confirmed,
deleted, and stored or retrieved from an SD memory card.
<<50P IN ASSIGN>>, <<50P OUT ASSIGN>>
Using the front panel controls and on-screen menus, the
functions are registered into the input pins of the parallel
remote (50PIN) connector and the statuses are registered
into its output pins.
<MENU>, <MENU SHIFT>
It is possible to move the operation (adjusting, storing, or
retrieving from internal memory and an SD memory card)
window related to the SYSTEM and the SETUP menu.
<ASSEMBLE>
The ASSEMBLE editing mode is selected on this menu
screen.
<INSERT>
The INSERT editing mode and editing channels are
selected on this menu screen.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
Allocating the function keys
Items allocated to function keys
Menu (6 types)
Menu hierarchy
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
1st
2nd (SHIFT)
1st
2nd (SHIFT)
3rd (F+SHIFT)
1st
2nd (SHIFT)
3rd (SHIFT)
1st
2nd (SHIFT)
1st
2nd (SHIFT)
1st
2nd (SHIFT)
1st
OUTPUT
PREROL
VID IN
TC/CTL
OUTREF
TC CLR
CAPSTN
CMP MD
R INH
VARMEM
DW CON
SUP LV
HOME
VIDEO
INT SG
UP CON
HUE
V LV
CONTRAST
DIN 12
C LV
BACK L
A3 IN
BRIGHT
A1 IN
A5 IN
VOLUME
TC SRC
SUPER
COLOR
A2 IN
A6 IN
A4 IN
A8 IN
DIN 34
DIN 78
M MIX
DF MOD
TIMER
AUDIO
DIN 56
A7 IN
RECCUE
TCG MD
C VPOS
TCG RG
DISPLY
RUN MD
C TYPE
TC
C HPOS
PF1
No factory settings (any items can be allocated to any keys).
PF2
PREV
NEXT
CARD
HOURS
CARD
MODE
PAGE
UMID
CLR
ROTATE
DIF1
AL CLR
CU-ROL
DIF2
CUE
MULTICUE function
2nd (SHIFT)
1st
WARN
STEP
DIAG
ERROR LOG function
2nd (SHIFT)
AL CLR
1st
2nd (SHIFT)
FILE
PF1 FT
CARD
PF1 BK
SYSTEM
PF2 BK
SETUP
50P IN
MENU
PF2 FT
50P OT
ASSEM
INSERT
ASSEM
A5
A1
A6
A2
A7
A3
A8
A4
TC
CUE
V
SYSTEM
SYSTEM MENU
(ON SCREEN)
CANCEL
CANCEL
RESET
RESET
SET
SET
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP
SETUP MENU
(ON SCREEN)
↑PREV
↓ NEXT
FILE
P. L OA D
LOCK
SET
EXIT
EXIT
LOAD ←
SAVE →
USER FILE BACKUP function
PF1,PF2
MENU ASSIGN function
CANCEL
RESET
DELETE
RESET
↑PREV
↓ NEXT
CARD
IC CARD function (MENU)
IC CARD function (ERRLOG)
IC CARD function
(MULTI CUE)
FORMAT
LOCK
SET
EXIT
EXIT
SAVE ←
LOAD →
50PIN
50pin ASSIGN function
CANCEL
↑PREV
↓NEXT
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<HOME>
The most basic settings for recording, playback and TC
operations are set on this menu screen.
F i press*:
When a function button is pressed while the F button is
held down, the setting can be changed while the button is
held down or at the instant when it is pressed. When the
function button is released, the original setting is restored.
Warning mark
Status display 2
Name of menu displayed
Remaining tape/total tape
Operation mode/speed
* When only the function button is pressed, message
F
F5
display “Press
+
” etc. blinks.
Function button
F1
F6
to
:
These buttons control the functions displayed in the
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Function Menu.
Time counter
<Note>
Backpage
menu
indicator
Changes in the settings made with the function buttons
that control the Setup Menu are reflected in the system
immediately, but about 5 seconds is required to store the
settings. To turn off the power after changing the settings,
wait about 5 seconds or more and then turn off the power.
Cue time
Status display 1
SHIFT
:
Status display3
This button shifts the display alternately between the
current function menu and the back page menu.
Back Page Menu Indicator
;:
This is displayed when the front page menu is
displayed.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
::
This is displayed when the back page menu is
displayed.
How to switch the settings
Toggle:
Function button operation inhibited indicator
BS
This is displayed when the
button is pressed while the
Each time a function button is pressed, the setting is
changed or entered.
F
button is held down. When it appears, the operation of
the function buttons can be inhibited. When the button is
F
pressed again while the
button is held down, the display
F i toggle*:
is cleared, and it becomes possible to operate the function
buttons.
When a function button is pressed while the F button is
held down, the setting can be changed or entered each
time.
Warning symbol
Toggle i ADJ:
When a warning occurs on the unit, the warning symbol (W)
blinks. (For details, refer to the Function Menu <DIAG> on
When a function button is pressed, the setting is
highlighted, and the status in which the setting can be
changed is established.
The ADJUST dial is used to change the setting.
When the same function button is pressed again and the
highlighting is released, the setting is entered.
Press:
When a function button is pressed, the setting can be
changed while the button is held down or at the instant
when it is pressed. When the function button is released,
the original setting is restored.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<HOME> (continued)
Display menu name
Display menu name
Description of menu
The most basic settings for recording, playback, and time code operation are made.
<HOME>
<VIDEO>
<HOME SHIFT>
<VIDEO SHIFT>
The basic input/output settings for video signals are made. The level of HD output
signals is also adjusted on this screen.
The basic input/output settings for audio signals are made.
<AUDIO SHIFT1>
<AUDIO SHIFT2>
<AUDIO>
<TC>
Various settings related to the time code are set. Superimposing the time code is also
set on this screen.
<TC SHIFT>
Up to 24 frequently used menu items can be registered. Press F1 (PF1)/F2 (PF2) on
the <MENU SHIFT> screen to display the menu items that can be registered on the
connected video monitor and the LCD monitor.
Up to 60 cue points can be set. In PAGE mode, 6 cue points can be managed on a
single page and (6 pieces a 10 pages) of the cue points in total can be managed on a
page-by-page basis.
<PF1 FT>
<PF2 FT>
<PF1 BK>
<PF2 BK>
General
menu
<CUE>
<CUE SHIFT>
z The Warning/Hour meter can be confirmed on this screen.
z The error log files can be confirmed, deleted, and/or stored in/called from the SD
memory card on the SHIFT screen.
This is used for moving to the operation (adjustment, storing in/calling from the
internal memory, and an SD memory card) screen for SYSTEM SETUP MENU.
<DIAG>
<DIAG> SHIFT>
<MENU SHIFT>
<MENU>
This selects the ASSEMBLE edit mode.
<ASSEMBLE>
<INSERT>
This selects the INSERT edit mode and the editing channels.
The SYSTEM menu is displayed on the connected video monitor and the LCD monitor
and can be adjusted.
The SETUP MENU is displayed on the connected video monitor and the LCD monitor
and can be adjusted.
<<SYSTEM MENU>>
<<SETUP MENU>>
It is possible to record the present information on up to four settings, including the
Setup Menu contents in backup memory with titles, and to then recall the records from
memory.
<<FILE>>
It is possible to display the Setup Menu items that can be registered on the connected
video monitor and the LCD monitor and register them on the function buttons.
<<PF1 FT ASSIGN>>
<<PF1 BK ASSIGN>>
<<PF2 FT ASSIGN>>
<<PF2 BK ASSIGN>>
Special
menu
It is possible to record information on up to eight current settings, including the Setup
Menu contents on an SD card with titles and to then retrieve the records from the
card.
<<IC CARD/MENU>>
It is possible to record up to eight separate error log entries on an SD card with titles
and to then retrieve the records from the card.
It is possible to record up to eight separate entries in the multi-cue menu on an SD
card with titles and to then retrieve the records from the card.
<<IC CARD/ERR LOG>>
<<IC CARD/MULT CUE>>
The functions for the input terminal of the parallel remote connectors (50 pins) and the
status for the output connectors can be registered using the front panel, the
connected monitor, and the LCD monitor.
<<50P IN ASSIGN>>
<<50P OUT ASSIGN>>
System frequency display during 24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD
and SD) ,50 Hz (HD and SD) modes
When the 23/24 Hz mode, the 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode or the
50 Hz (HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25
(SYSTEM FREQ), the selected system frequency is
indicated on function button F1 to confirm the current
system frequency mode.
SYSTEM
23/24
23/24
The 23/24 Hz mode is selected.
The 25(HD) Hz mode is selected.
The 25(SD) Hz mode is selected.
The 50 (HD) Hz mode is selected.
The 50 (SD) Hz mode is selected.
25 (HD)
25 (SD)
50 (HD)
50 (SD)
F1
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<HOME> (continued)
Status display 1
VTR
Description of settings
PB
Playback format
This displays the format
used for playback.
1080i LP
720p LP
1080i SP
720p SP
50M
These settings indicate the DVCPRO HD-LP recording and playback mode.
These settings indicate the DVCPRO HD-SP playback mode.
These settings indicate the DVCPRO (50 Mbps format) playback mode.
<Note>
50Mp
In the case of “50Mp”, the format can be determined; however, images and audio will
not play back properly.
25M
DV
DVCAM
1080i
720p
These settings indicate the DVCPRO (25 Mbps format), DV and DVCAM playback
modes.
1
Recording format
This displays the format
used for recording.
The tape is recorded using the 1080i format.
The tape is recorded using the 720p format.
A cassette tape has not been inserted.
REC*
2
Tape management
information
- - -
TM INFO*
24P
24PA
25P
This displays the frame
rate (shooting speed)
information which is
recorded on a tape shot by
a variable frame rate
camera.
These settings indicate the recorded frame rate.
INVALID The tape management information is invalid.
<Note>
In some cases, the tape management information may be erroneously overwritten by
insert editing or tape dubbing, and it may not be possible to play back properly.
REF
Output reference
This displays the output
reference status.
HD23
HD24
HD25
HD50
HD59
HD60
IN50
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The frame frequency
is 23.98 Hz.
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The frame frequency
is 24 Hz.
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The frame frequency
is 25 Hz.
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field frequency is
50 Hz.
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field frequency is
59.94 Hz.
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field frequency is
60 Hz.
The HD serial input signal has been selected as the reference. The field frequency is
50 Hz.
IN59
The HD serial input signal has been selected as the reference. The field frequency is
59.94 Hz.
IN60
The HD serial input signal has been selected as the reference. The field frequency is
60 Hz.
INT23
The signal (23.98 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the
reference.
INT24
INT25
INT50
INT59
The signal (24 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.
The signal (25 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.
The signal (50 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.
The signal (59.94 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the
reference.
INT60
The signal (60 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.
NTSC59
The SD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field frequency is
59.94 Hz.
PAL50
The SD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field frequency is
50 Hz.
INT59N
The SD REF signal has been selected by the OUT REF setting. Since the SD REF
signal is not input, the signal (59.94 Hz) from the internal generator is selected as the
reference.
INT50P
The SD REF input signal has been selected by the OUT REF setting. Since the SD
REF signal is not input, the signal (50 Hz) from the internal generator is selected as
the reference.
*1: This status is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD) or 50 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected as the
system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.
*2: This status is not displayed when the 59/60 Hz or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<HOME> (continued)
Status display 2
Operation mode (speed) display
This indicates the current operation mode (including the
speed display).
Indicator
Description of setting
This lights when the SCH phase of
the SDREF signal is within the
prescribed range.
Display
EJECT
Operation mode
SCH
Eject mode
This lights when color framing is
locked.
This lights during recording or
playback in the drop frame mode.
<Note>
If the time code data could not be
read properly (“T¢R” is displayed),
the display of the previous status is
held.
STANDBY OFF
T.RELEASE
STOP
Standby OFF mode
Tension release mode
Stop mode
CF
DF
PREROLL
PLAY
Preroll mode
Playback mode
Special playback (playback phase adjustment)
mode (FWD direction)
PLAY +
Special playback (playback phase adjustment)
mode (REV direction)
Status display 3
PLAY j
Indicator
Description of setting
REC
Recording mode
For EE mode, this indicates that UMID information is
available in input information.
When a tape is played back, this indicates that UMID
information is available on the tape.
When [SQUEEZ] is selected in Setup Menu No. 620
(DOWNCON MODE) and down convert output is set
to wide screen, this indicates that wide screen
information is recorded on the tape for SD tape
playback.
JOG
REV/STILL/FWD
Jog mode
UM
VAR (speed)
[j4.9 to i4.9]
Slow mode
SHTL (speed)
[j32.0 to i32.0]
Shuttle mode
WD
GM
FF
Fast forwarding mode
Rewinding mode
Editing mode
This indicates that the gamma function is selected in
Setup Menu No. 693 (GAMMA SEL).
REW
EDIT
F6
This is indicated when the function button
(VERMEM) of <HOME SHIFT> is turned [ON].
AUTO EDIT
PREVIEW
REVIEW
Automatic editing mode
Preview mode
VM
VM
Whenever
is displayed, the variable memory is
operable. (For details, refer to [Variable memory
function].)
Review mode
When function F6 (VARMEM) on <HOME SHIFT> is “ON”
DSPD (speed)
Initial speed setting of variable memory
[j1.0 to i2.0]
DSMP (speed)
[j1.0 to i2.0]
Playback speed memory mode of variable
memory
DPLY (speed)
[j1.0 to i2.0]
Playback mode of variable memory
DPRV (speed)
[j1.0 to i2.0]
Preview mode of variable memory editing
Execution mode of variable memory editing
DEDT (speed)
[j1.0 to i2.0]
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<HOME> (continued)
Remaining tape/total tape display
The lengths of the remaining tape and total tape of the
inserted cassette are displayed in increments of minutes.
Example:
(10 minutes remaining on a 64-minute tape)
Total tape
REM 10/ 64
Remaining tape
<Note>
Slight errors may occur. The remaining tape value blinks
when less than 3 minutes of the tape remain.
Cue time display
This displays the currently registered cue time. [For details
on the cue time operation, refer to [Cue time registration,
Cue time operations can be performed on the HOME screen
only.
Time counter displays
Display
CTL
Description
CTL counter data
TCG
UBG
tcg
Time code data of time code generator
User bitsuser bits data of time code generator
When the time code data of time code generator is
preset
ubg
When the user bits data of time code generator is
preset
TCR/T¢R Time code data of time code reader
UBR/U¢R User bitsuser bits data of time code reader
If the time code data or user bits data could not be read out
properly, “T¢R” or “U¢R” is displayed. If the CTL signal is
present, the time code data is supplemented by CTL.
TCR 00:00:00:00.
Field mark
[1st field: “ ”/2nd field: “.”]
(This does not appear when the i0.3k or
j0.3k speed is exceeded.)
Drop frame mark (59/60 Hz mode only)
[Non-drop frame mode: “:”/drop frame
mode: “.”]
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<HOME> (continued)
Playback reference signal specifications for tape playback
During tape playback, the video output reference signals are as shown in the table below.
In the 59.94 Hz/60 Hz or 50 Hz mode
Input signals
Menu item No.031
HD_REF
1
REF_IN
INPUT
AUTO
SD_REF
E-AUTO
INPUT*
HD_REF_IN
INPUT
HD_REF_IN
Internal SD
HD_REF_IN
Complies with
INPUT
frequency
Complies with
HD_REF_IN
frequency
Complies with
HD_REF_IN
frequency
Complies with
HD_REF_IN
frequency
Input
Not input
Input
59.94Hz
Internal SD
59.94Hz
HD_REF_IN
HD_REF_IN
Internal HD
HD_REF_IN
HD_REF_IN
Complies with
menu item No.030
frequency
Complies with
HD_REF_IN
frequency
Complies with
HD_REF_IN
frequency
Complies with
HD_REF_IN
frequency
SD_REF_IN
INPUT
Internal HD
SD_REF_IN
59.94Hz
SD_REF_IN
Complies with
INPUT
frequency
Complies with
menu item No.030
frequency
59.94Hz
59.94Hz
SD_REF_IN
SD_REF_IN
59.94Hz
Internal HD
Internal HD
SD_REF_IN
59.94Hz
SD_REF_IN
59.94Hz
Complies with
menu item No.030 menu item No.030
Complies with
Not input
Input
frequency
frequency
INPUT
INPUT
Internal HD
Internal SD
59.94Hz
INPUT
Complies with
INPUT
frequency
Complies with
INPUT
frequency
Complies with
menu item No.030
frequency
Complies with
INPUT
frequency
None
Internal HD
Internal HD
Internal HD
Internal SD
59.94Hz
Internal HD
Complies with
Complies with
Complies with
Complies with
menu item No.030
frequency
Not input
menu item No.030 menu item No.030 menu item No.030
frequency frequency frequency
*1 If “1394” or “INT SG (internal standard signal)” is selected for the video input signal, the video output reference signal will always be
“Internal HD.”
<Notes>
z When [E-AUTO] is selected in MENU No. 031 (OUT REF), the system operates when [INPUT] is selected in edit mode or
when [AUTO] is selected in any mode other than edit mode.
z When using the SD > HD up-converter and HD > HD cross-converter, input the HD tri-level sync signal that supports the
HD output format in order to initiate operation using HD_REF_IN.
z During SD tape playback, operation is not possible in the 60 Hz mode.
z When the HD SDI output signals are output at 60 Hz/24 Hz, the SD SDI signal is output in the NO SYNC status, and the
analog composite signals are output in black-and-white mode (burst OFF).
z All the HD SDI output, SD SDI output, analog composite output, analog component output, audio output and TC output
signals are output in phase with the REF input.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<HOME> (continued)
In the 23.98 Hz/24 Hz mode
Input signals
Playback reference signal
REF_IN
HD_REF_IN
HD_REF_IN
None
Complies with HD_REF_IN
frequency
Internal HD
Complies with menu item No.030
frequency
In the 25 Hz (HD), 25 Hz (SD), 50 Hz (HD) or 50 Hz (SD) mode
Input signals
Menu item No.031
REF_IN
AUTO
INPUT
HD_REF
SD_REF
E-AUTO
HD_REF_IN
Internal HD
HD_REF_IN
Internal SD
HD_REF_IN
Complies with
HD_REF_IN
frequency
Complies with
HD_REF_IN
frequency
Complies with
HD_REF_IN
frequency
HD_REF_IN
50Hz
50Hz
SD_REF_IN
50Hz
Internal HD
50Hz
Internal HD
50Hz
SD_REF_IN
50Hz
SD_REF_IN
50Hz
SD_REF_IN
None
Internal HD
50Hz
Internal HD
50Hz
Internal HD
50Hz
Internal SD
50Hz
Internal HD
50Hz
<Notes>
In the 25 Hz (SD) or 50 Hz (SD) mode, black signals are output from the HD SDI output connectors.
I
Internal HD:
With HD tape playback as the reference, operation uses a 74 MHz clock signal in the free-run mode.
Internal SD:
With SD tape playback as the reference, operation uses a 4fsc clock signal in the free-run mode.
When “90H” is selected as the menu item No.26 HD SYS H ADV, the HD output is output with a phase 90H ahead of the SD
output.
When the SD REF signal is input, the REF input and SD output signals are in-phase, and when the HD REF signal is input,
the REF input and HD output signalsare in-phase.
z The audio output and TC output signals are output in-phase with the HD output signals.
z With the 720p format, there is a phase difference of 120H.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<HOME> (continued)
Registering TCG values
1 Selecting the values
Press the F3 TC/CTL button to select TC.
T
Press the
button. The selected item (cue time or TC)
is now highlighted.
Turn the ADJUST dial to select TC.
T
Again press the
button. A single digit is highlighted,
and the mode for inputting numerical values is
established.
<Notes>
zThe UBG value and cue time can be registered in the
same way. The CTL value cannot be registered.
zTC or UB can be registered only when the internal time
code generator has been selected.
2 Inputting numbers and letters
0
9
Press the
values.
to
number keys to input numerical
F
7
Use the
and
buttons to input A, B and C, and the
F
8
and
buttons to input D, E and F.
To move the input digit, turn the ADJUST dial.
F
To input a minus sign, press the
and TRIM– buttons
when the left-most digit is highlighted.
F
To input a “plus” symbol, press
or press
and the TRIM+ button
0
when the digit to the far left is inverted. (The
display goes blank.)
To clear all the digits to zero, press the
buttons.
F
0
and
<Notes>
z Every time when the
7
button is pressed while
button, the display changes in the
F
pressing the
following sequence: A > B > C > A > B and so
on.
The same applies when D, E and F are input using
F
8
and
.
z If, when “REV” has been selected as the setup menu
F
item No.144 (TC INPUT) setting, the
button is
released while a letter is being input, the displayed
character will be entered.
z Letters can be input only while a UBG value is being
registered.
z The input of a minus number is possible only while
the cue time is being registered after “d12h” is
selected as the setup menu No.002 (TAPE TIMER)
F3
setting and CTL is selected by the
button.
TC/CTL
z If “REV” has been selected as the setup menu item
No.144 (TC INPUT) setting, the input starts from the
highest order digit (the display appears from the far
right). However, turning the ADJUST dial once will
restore the NORMAL input mode.
3 Entering the input values
ENT
Press the
button. The value input is registered,
and the normal display is restored.
<Notes>
C
z To cancel the registration, press the
button.
z If the input value is outside the registration enable
INVALID
range, the
alarm blinks, and the value
cannot be registered until it has been corrected.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<HOME> (continued)
Function button/
item
Switching
method
Corresponding setup menu
item
Setting
Description of setting
F1
OUTPUT
Toggle
TAPE
EE
No. 140
OUTPUT
For selecting the output signals.
<In the STOP mode>
TAPE: In the STOP mode, the signals played
back from the tape are output.
During recording or editing (*),
simultaneous playback signals are
output.
*: Setup menu item No.302 (CONFI
EDIT) must be set.
EE:
The input signals selected by the setup
menu items No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL)
and No.713 (CH1 IN SEL) to No.724 (D
IN SEL 78) settings are output.
F2
___
F3
___
___
___
___
___
Toggle
TC
UB
CTL
For selecting the time counter display.
2
TC/CTL*
TC:
UB:
The time code value is displayed.
The user bits value is displayed.
CTL: The control signal (time data) is
displayed.
F4
Press
RESET
___
For resetting the time counter display.
1
TC CLR*
F4
If the
button is pressed while the control
signal (time data) is displayed on the time
counter, it is reset to zero.
F5
CMP MD
F i toggle
NORMAL
DARK
No. 689
COMP MODE
Refer to the SETUP menu.
<Note>
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD)
mode, or the 50 Hz (HD, SD) mode or the 50 Hz
mode is selected in Setup Menu No. 25
(SYSTEM FREQ), this item is not displayed.
F6
F i toggle
No. 113
OFF
Refer to the setup menu.
R INH
REC INH
<Note>
ALL
The setting can be changed from OFF to ALL
simply by operating the function button without
PRE
NORM
V/CTL
F
pressing the
button.
F1(SHIFT)
PREROL
F2(SHIFT)
___
Toggle i ADJ
___
0s --- 5s --- 30s
No. 000
P-ROLL TIME
___
Refer to the setup menu.
___
___
F3(SHIFT)
OUTREF
F i toggle
AUTO
INPUT
No. 031
OUT REF
Refer to the setup menu.
HD_REF
SD_REF
E-AUTO
F4(SHIFT)
CAPSTN
F i toggle
___
2F
4F
___
No. 109
CAP. LOCK
Refer to the setup menu.
___
F5(SHIFT)
___
___
F6(SHIFT)
VARMEM*
Toggle
OFF
ON
___
For selecting the variable memory mode.
1
OFF:The variable memory mode is not used.
ON: The status is established in which variable
memory playback or variable memory
editing is enabled.
1
* When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or the 50 Hz (HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
2
* When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or the 50 Hz (HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), the CTL cannot be selected. The TC is selected when turning on the power.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<VIDEO>
The basic input/output settings for the video signals are set, and the level of the HD output signals can also be adjusted on
these menu screens.
1. Video signal input switching, internal signal source
type changing, and up-converter aspect ratio
conversion
2. Video signal output level adjustments
Time counter
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
3. LCD monitor brightness and color adjustments
SHIFT
F
This display appears when the
+
are pressed.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Refer to Setup Menu Nos. 670 to 673.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Function button/
item
Switching
method
Corresponding setup menu
item
Setting
Description of setting
F1
VID IN
Toggle
INT SG
HDSDI
1394
No. 600
VIDEO IN SEL
Refer to the setup menu.
SDSDI
F2
INT SG
Toggle
100%CB
75%CB
SMPTE
ARIB
No. 601
VIDEO INT SG
Refer to the setup menu.
MB
RAMP
BLACK
PLL
EQ
F3
___
F4
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
F5
UP CON
Toggle
S-PANL
CROP
No. 621
UPCONV MODE
Refer to the setup menu.
STRECH
F6
DW CON
Toggle
CROP
LT-BOX
SQUEEZ
14:9
No. 620
DOWNCON MODE
Refer to the setup menu.
13:9
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<VIDEO> (continued)
Function button/
item
Switching
method
Corresponding setup menu
item
Setting
Description of setting
When “CMPST” is selected as the setup menu item No.650 (STYLE) setting
F1 (SHIFT)
___
F2 (SHIFT)
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
F3 (SHIFT)
V LV
Toggle + ADJ
0.0% ---
100.0%
---200.0%
Refer to the setup menu.
No. 662
V LEVEL
F
F
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use
i Press.
Refer to the setup menu.
F4 (SHIFT)
C LV
Toggle + ADJ
Toggle + ADJ
Toggle + ADJ
0.0% ---
100.0% ---
141.3%
No. 663
C LEVEL
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use
i Press.
Refer to the setup menu.
F5 (SHIFT)
HUE (AJ-HD1800P)
C PH (AJ-HD1800E)
j31.0 ---
No. 664
HUE
0.0 ---
+31.0
F
To return to the UNITY (0.0) level, use
Press.
i
F6 (SHIFT)
SUP LV
(AJ-HD1800P)
j10.0% ---
Refer to the setup menu.
0.0% ---
+10.0%
No. 665
SETUP LVL
F
To return to the UNITY (0.0%) level, use
Press.
i
BK LV (AJ-HD1800E)
When “CMPNT” is selected as the setup menu item No.650 (STYLE) setting
F1 (SHIFT)
___
F2 (SHIFT)
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
F3 (SHIFT)
Y HD
Toggle + ADJ
0.0% --- 100.0% ---141.3%
Refer to the setup menu.
No. 653
Y LVL(HD)
F
F
F
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use
i Press.
Refer to the setup menu.
F4 (SHIFT)
Pb HD
Toggle + ADJ
Toggle + ADJ
Toggle + ADJ
0.0% --- 100.0% ---141.3%
0.0% --- 100.0% ---141.3%
No. 654
Pb LVL(HD)
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use
i Press.
Refer to the setup menu.
F5 (SHIFT)
Pr HD
No. 655
Pr LVL(HD)
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use
i Press.
Refer to the setup menu.
F6 (SHIFT)
BK HD
j10.0% --- 0.0% ---
No. 656
BK LVL(HD)
+10.0%
F
To return to the UNITY (0.0%) level, use
Press.
i
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<AUDIO>
The basic input/output settings for the audio signals are set on these menu screens.
1. Audio signal input selection (CH1 - CH4)
3. Audio volume control switching, CUE audio
recording signal selection, and audio monitor mix
switching
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
2. Audio signal input selection (CH5 - CH8)
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Function button/
item
Switching Corresponding setup menu
method item
Setting
Description of setting
F1
Toggle
INT SG
No. 713
Refer to the setup menu.
A1 IN*
CH1 IN SEL
DIGI
ANA
F2
A2 IN*
Toggle
INT SG
DIGI
No. 714
CH2 IN SEL
Refer to the setup menu.
ANA
F3
DIN 12
Toggle
Toggle
AES
SDI
INT SG
DIGI
No. 721
D IN SEL 12
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
F4
A3 IN*
No. 715
CH3 IN SEL
ANA
F5
A4 IN*
Toggle
INT SG
DIGI
No. 716
CH4 IN SEL
Refer to the setup menu.
ANA
F6
DIN 34
Toggle
Toggle
AES
SDI
INT SG
DIGI
No. 722
D IN SEL 34
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
F1(SHIFT1)
A5 IN*
No. 717
CH5 IN SEL
ANA1
F2(SHIFT1)
A6 IN*
Toggle
INT SG
DIGI
No. 718
CH6 IN SEL
Refer to the setup menu.
ANA2
F3(SHIFT1)
DIN 56
Toggle
Toggle
AES
SDI
INT SG
DIGI
No. 723
D IN SEL 56
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
F4(SHIFT1)
A7 IN*
No. 719
CH7 IN SEL
ANA3
F5(SHIFT1)
A8 IN*
Toggle
Toggle
INT SG
DIGI
ANA4
AES
SDI
No. 720
CH8 IN SEL
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
F6(SHIFT1)
DIN 78
No. 724
D IN SEL 78
* When the VIDEO input switch is set to 1394, all buttons from A1 IN to A8 IN become 1394 input.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<AUDIO> (continued)
Function button/
item
Switching
method
Corresponding setup menu
item
Setting
Description of setting
Refer to the setup menu.
F1(SHIFT2)
VOLUME
Toggle
REC
PB
AUTO
No. 141
VOLUME
For switching what is to be controlled by the
audio volume controls. (The levels of all the
CH1jCH8 channels are controlled.)
F2(SHIFT2)
___
___
___
___
___
F3 (SHIFT2)
RECCUE
Toggle
CUE
CH1
No. 733
REC CUE
Refer to the setup menu.
<Note>
For 1394 input, audio is not recorded on the
CUE track, and the sound is muted.
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH1+2
CH3+4
CH5+6
CH7+8
CH1-8
F4 (SHIFT2)
___
F5 (SHIFT2)
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
F6 (SHIFT2)
M MIX
Toggle
OFF
L
No. 737
MONI MIX
Refer to the setup menu.
R
L/R
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<TC>
The TC-related settings are performed on these menu screens. Whether the TC is to be superimposed onto the display can
also be set on this screen.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Function button/
item
Switching
method
Corresponding setup menu
item
Setting
Description of setting
F1
TC SRC
Toggle
When HD SDI, INT No. 507
Refer to the setup menu.
TC SOURCE
SG or 1394 is
selected:
INT
EXT_L
SLTC
SVITC
When SD SDI is
selected:
INT
EXT_L
VITC
F2
___
___
___
___
___
F3
TCG MD
Toggle
REGEN
PRE
No. 503
TCG MODE
Refer to the setup menu.
AUTO
TC&UB
TC
F4
TCG RG
Toggle
No. 505
TCG REGEN
Refer to the setup menu.
UB
F5
RUN MD
Toggle
REC
FREE
DF
NDF
OFF
ON
0 --- 6 --- 37
No. 504
RUN MODE
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
F6
DF MOD
F i toggle
Toggle
No. 511
DF MODE
F1 (SHIFT)
SUPER
No. 005
SUPER
F2 (SHIFT)
C HPOS
F3 (SHIFT)
C VPOS
F4 (SHIFT)
DISPLY
Toggle i ADJ
Toggle i ADJ
Toggle
No. 007
CHARA H-POS
No. 008
CHARA V-POS
No. 006
DISPLAY SEL
0 --- 23 --- 32
TIME
T&STA
T&S&M
T&RT
T&YMD
T&MDY
T&DMY
T&UB
T&CLT
T&T
F5 (SHIFT)
C TYPE
Toggle
Toggle
WHITE
W/OUT
12h
24h
No. 009
CHARA TYPE
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
F6 (SHIFT)
TIMER
No. 002
TAPE TIMER
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<CUE>
A maximum of 60 cue points can be set on these menu
Moving to registered points
F3
screens. When “AUTO” has been selected as the
The highlighting on the registered point display area is
moved by turning the ADJUST dial. It is moved in the
ascending order of points when the dial is turned clockwise
and in the descending order of points when it is turned
counterclockwise. When “AUTO” has been selected as the
(PAGE) setting on the AUTO PAGE mode <CUE SHIFT>
menu, up to 10 pages of cue points with 6 cue points on
each page can be managed on a page-by-page basis. The
60 cue points are indicated using the page number display
and registered point display areas.
F3
(PAGE) setting on the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the
<Note>
highlighting can be moved also to the previous or next page.
z Depending on the setting selected for F4 (ROTATE) on
the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the following applies to moving
the highlighting in the ascending order of points.
When “OFF” is set:
Cue points cannot be registered, prerolled, etc. if a setting
other than “ENA” has been selected as the setup menu item
No.001 (LOCAL ENA) setting in the REMOTE mode.
Page number display area
Registered point display area
Cue point data
display areas
The highlighting cannot be moved from page 9 to page
0.
When “ON” is set:
The highlighting can be moved from page 9 to page 0.
z In moving in the descending order of points, the
highlighting cannot be moved from page 0 to page 9.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Search point and registered point operations
F3
Each time the
(MODE) button of the <CUE> menu is
pressed, the search mode and cue point registration mode
are switched alternately. Perform the search point or
registered point operations in the respective mode.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
z When the power is turned on, the search point or
registered point, whichever was established when the
power was last turned off, is established.
z When the setting for F3 (PAGE) or F4 (ROTATE) on the
<CUE SHIFT> menu has been changed, “01” (page 0/
point no.1) is set for both the search and registered points.
Page number display area
The page number from 0 to 9 is indicated here.
Registered point display area
On each page, six cue point data managed by registered
point numbers are displayed. A point whose registered point
number is highlighted is targeted for registration and search.
Shown below is the correlation between the page numbers
and registered point numbers.
Cue point registration mode
It is possible to register points to which the tape is to be
prerolled. When the display page has been changed using
the F1 (PREV) or F2 (NEXT) button on the <CUE> menu,
F3
the following applies depending on the setting for
on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.
(PAGE)
Page no. Registered points Pageno. Registered points
0
1
2
3
4
01–06
11–16
21–26
31–36
41–46
5
6
7
8
9
51–56
61–66
71–76
81–86
91–96
When “MANU” is set:
Both the search and registered points move to the top
of the changed page.
When “AUTO” is set:
Only the registered point moves to the top of the
changed page; the search point does not move.
Page operations
Pages can be scrolled in the forward or reverse direction
using theF F1 ](PREV) or F2 (NEXT) function buttons.
Search mode
The desired search point can be selected, and the tape can
be prerolled to that point.
F4
z Depending on the setting selected for
](ROTATE) on
When the display page has been changed using the F1 [
the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the following applies to scrolling
pages in the forward direction.
When “OFF” is set:
Page 0 cannot be scrolled forward from page 9.
When “ON” is set:
Page 0 can be scrolled forward from page 9.
z In scrolling pages in the reverse direction, page 9 cannot
be scrolled in reverse from page 0.
F2
(PREV) or
(NEXT) button on the <CUE> menu, the
F3
following applies depending on the setting for
the <CUE SHIFT> menu.
When “MANU” is set:
Both the search and registered points move to the top
of the changed page.
When “AUTO” is set:
(PAGE) on
Only the search point moves to the top of the changed
page; the registered point does not move.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<CUE> (continued)
When registering cue points by number
1. Turn the ADJUST dial to highlight the desired registered
Cue point registration
Turn the ADJUST dial to highlight the point which is to be
point display area
T
SET
registered. When the
button is pressed, the current
2. Press the
button twice. Only the “10’s” hour digit of
tape position is registered as the cue point. The following
the selected cue point is now highlighted, and the
change enable status is established.
<Note>
When “REV” has been selected as the setup menu item
No.144 (TC INPUT) setting, the input of the number will
start from the higher-order digit (it will be displayed start-
ing from the far right).
F3
applies depending on the setting for
<CUE SHIFT> menu.
(PAGE) on the
When “MANU” is set:
Operations are performed on the selected page. Press
SET
the
button to register the points in succession
(CUE¢1 > CUE¢2 > ... > CUE¢6) on the selected
page. (Any points already registered will be overwrit-
ten.)
3. Input the number using the number keys. Movement
from one digit to the next is done automatically after one
number has been input. The desired digit can also be
selected by turning the ADJUST dial.
The registration is automatically terminated when
1
CUE¢6 is registered on the page. (* )
A change must be made to the points to be registered if
more cue points are to be registered. Check that the
cue point registration mode is established, change the
page, and change the points to be registered. In this
case, the search point will also move automatically to
the top (CUE¢1) of the changed page.
ENT
4. To enter the number, press the
button.
C
When the display screen is switched or when the
button is pressed during the input process, the change
enable status is released, and the setting is canceled.
Clearing registered points
Clearing all the registered points together
F4
*1 If “ON” is selected as the
] (ROTATE) setting on
the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the registration of the cue
points will rotate on the same page in the following
order: CUE¢1 > CUE¢2 > ... > CUE¢6 >
CUE¢1 > CUE¢2 > ...
F5
When
the
(AL CLR) on the <CUE> menu is pressed while
button is held down, all the cue point data currently
F
selected is cleared. The range of the points which are
cleared is as follows depending on the setting for
on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.
F3
(PAGE)
When “AUTO” is set:
When “MANU” is set:
When a page become full during the cue point registra-
tion process, operation automatically moves to the next
page, and registration continues. When CUE96 on the
last page is reached, registration is automatically termi-
All the points on the currently selected page are
cleared.
When “AUTO” is set:
All the points on all the pages are cleared.
2
nated. (* )
After clearing, the search and registered points appear as
A change must be made to the points to be registered if
more cue points are to be registered. Check that the
cue point registration mode is established, change the
page, and change the points to be registered. In this
case, the search point will not be changed.
F3
follows depending on the setting for
<CUE SHIFT> menu.
(PAGE) on the
When “MANU” is set:
A return is made to the top (CUE¢1) of the page con-
cerned
When “AUTO” is set:
F4
*2 If “ON” is selected as the
(ROTATE) setting on
A return is made automatically to the top (CUE01) of
the first page.
* Points are cleared whether “ENTRY” (cue point
registration mode) or “SEARCH” (search mode) is
selected as the setting for [ F3 ] (MODE) on the <CUE>
menu.
the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the registration of the cue
points will rotate from page 9 (CUE96) to page 0
(CUE01).
Clearing individual registered points
When the F4 (CLR) button on the <CUE> menu is pressed,
the currently selected cue point data is cleared.
* The point is cleared only when “ENTRY” (cue point
F3
registration mode) is selected as the setting for ]
(MODE) on the <CUE> menu.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<CUE> (continued)
Search operations
Turn the ADJUST dial to highlight the desired registered
point.
When the PREROLL button is pressed, the preroll operation
is initiated. The tape will not be prerolled if no cue points
have been registered.
Since the tape is not prerolled even if the PREROLL button
is pressed when the cue point registration mode is
established, be absolutely sure to check that the search
mode is established.
F5
[The time selected by the <CUE SHIFT> menu
[ (CU-
ROL) setting, which is different from the normal preroll time,
takes effect as the preroll time in this mode.]
Function button/
item
Switching
method
Corresponding setup menu
item
Setting
Description of setting
F1
PREV
F2
NEXT
F3
MODE
___
___
___
___
___
___
For multi-cue page forward scrolling.
Press
For multi-cue page forward scrolling.
Press
SEARCH
ENTRY
___
For selecting the search or cue point
registration mode.
Toggle
F4
CLR
For clearing the currently selected cue data.
Press
F3
ENTRY must be selected as the
setting.
(MODE)
F5
AL CLR
___
___
SHIFT
F3
When MANU is selected by
+
(PAGE): All the cue data on the currently
displayed page is cleared.
FiPress
SHIFT
F3
When AUTO is selected by
+
(PAGE): All the cue data on all the pages is
cleared.
F6
___
F1 (SHIFT)
___
F2 (SHIFT)
CARD
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
For calling the MULTI CUE file operation menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
Refer to the setup menu.
___
FiPress
Toggle
Toggle
Toggle i ADJ
___
F3 (SHIFT)
PAGE
MANU
AUTO
OFF
No. 131
PAGE MODE
F4 (SHIFT)
ROTATE
No. 132
ROTA MODE
ON
F5 (SHIFT)
CU-ROL
F6(SHIFT)
___
0s --- 5s --- 15s
No. 011
CU-ROLL TIME
___
___
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<DIAG>
This enables confirmation of information such as the
warning/hour-meter/UMID.
General description
When the following warnings have occurred while the tape is
running, the warning messages, time codes and operating
modes are saved, and a list of this information can be read
out on the LCD monitor. Up to 99 warnings which have
occurred can be saved. If the storage capacity of 99
warnings is exceeded, the processing that is conducted as a
result is based on the setup menu item No.015 (AUTO
STEP) setting.
Verification, deletion of the error log file, retention/call to the
SD memory card can do with the SHIFT picture.
Warning mark
Description
Warning messages
which are saved
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
NO RF
A blank section on the tape lasting more than
1 second has been detected. (During normal
playback)
SV NOT LOCKED
LOW RF
The servo has been disengaged for more
than 3 seconds. (During recording, normal
playback or editing)
An envelope level which is about 1/3 of nor-
mal or a CTL level which is about 1/6 of nor-
mal has been detected for more than 1
second. (During recording, normal playback
or editing)
Warning display
When a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning mark (W)
blinks at the top left of the screen. If F1 (WARN) is now
pressed, the details of the warning can be checked out on
the LCD monitor.
HIGH ERROR RATE The error rate has deteriorated, and correc-
tion or compensation has been applied to the
video or audio playback signals. (During nor-
mal playback)
When more than one warning has occurred, turn the ADJ
dial to scroll through the messages.
LCD monitor displays
Operation mode display
Hour-meter display
Saved warning status display
F2
When
(HOURS) is pressed, the hour-meter information
can be checked out on the LCD monitor.
UMID display
Press F2 (UMID) to confirm the current UMID information
for the image on the LCD monitor.
Time code
display
DIAG-MENU
UMID INFO
MATNO 00001234005678BA
00B0458201000001
COPY
OWNR
POS
0
JPN :ORG :USER
3775m 3D
Warning display
E
N
180'00'00.0'
90'00'00.0'
DATE
TIME
JAN-28-02
23:30:30 +03h00m
Operation mode display
This indicates the operation mode at the point when the
warning was saved.
Warning display
DIF Status display
F5
Press F4 (DIF1) or
(DIF2) to display the different kinds
of information about the current DIF (IEEE 1394 interface).
This indicates the warning message which is saved.
Saved warning status display
DIAG-MENU
DIF STATUS 1
DIAG-MENU
DIF STATUS 2
<OUTPUT>
<INPUT>
This indicates the number of the currently displayed warning
which has been saved and the total number of warnings
which have been saved.
NODE CNT
MY ID
1
FMT
FMT
RATE
HD100
1X
RATE
N/P
0
N/P
NTSC
63
ROOT ID
IRM ID
0
CHN
63 CHN
SPEED
0
SPEED
400
OK
RCV ID
0
STAT
STOP START
VIDEO
GAP CNT
EUI-64
63
VIDEO
AUDIO
OK
Time code display
0080458200000000
AUDIO
OK
This indicates the time code at the point when the warning
was saved.
Error log function
SHIFT
The error log mode can be selected by pressing the
button and switching the screen to <DIAG SHIFT>.
Cueing up the tape to the warning point
The warning list displayed on the LCD monitor can be
scrolled by turning the ADJ dial. When the warning
occurrence point to be checked is selected and the
PREROLL button is pressed, the tape is cued up to the
position of the time code which has been saved.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<DIAG> (continued)
Function button/
item
Switching
method
Corresponding setup menu
item
Setting
Description of setting
F1
WARN
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
For displaying the warning messages on the
LCD monitor.
F2
HOURS
___
For displaying the hour-meter on the LCD
monitor.
F3
UMID
___
The UMID information is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
F4
DIF1
___
The DIF status 1 is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
F5
DIF2
___
The DIF status 2 is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
F6
___
___
___
F1 (SHIFT)
STEP
Toggle
FiPress
___
OFF
ON
No. 015
AUTO STEP
Refer to the setup menu.
F2 (SHIFT)
CARD
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
For calling the error log file operation menu.
F3 (SHIFT)
___
___
F4 (SHIFT)
___
___
___
F5 (SHIFT)
AL CLR
FiPress
___
For clearing error log files.
___
F6 (SHIFT)
___
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
Concerning the setup menu item No.015 (AUTO
STEP) setting (factory setting: OFF)
Up to 99 warning messages can be saved by the error log
function, and this setup menu item determines what kind of
save processing is to be conducted when this storage
capacity is exceeded.
OFF: 99 messages are set as the upper limit, and no
further messages of warnings that occur will be
saved.
ON: 99 messages are saved, and any further message of
a warnings that occurs is saved in No.99. The
warning messages already saved are each shifted
down by one number in succession.
Messages saved when ON is selected as the
setting
No. in
which
message
is saved
No. in
which
message
is saved
Saved warning
Saved warning
1/99
2/99
Warning 1
Warning 2
1/99
2/99
Warning 2
Warning 3
→
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
99/99
Warning 99
99/99
Warning 100
When up to 99 messages have been saved and the 100th warning
has occurred
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<MENU>
These enable movement to the menu screens for operations (adjustments, saving data onto or loading it from the internal
memory or SD memory cards) relating to the SYSTEM and SETUP menus.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Function button/
item
Switching
method
Corresponding setup menu
item
Setting
Description of setting
F1
FILE
FiPress
___
___
For calling the operation menu for saving the
SYSTEM and SETUP adjustment values (in the
internal memory).
F2
CARD
FiPress
___
___
For calling the operation menu for saving the
SYSTEM and SETUP adjustment values (onto
the SD memory card).
F3
___
F4
SYSTEM
F5
SETUP
F6
___
F1 (SHIFT)
PF1 FT
F2 (SHIFT)
PF1 BK
F3 (SHIFT)
PF2 FT
F4 (SHIFT)
PF2 BK
F5 (SHIFT)
50P IN
F6 (SHIFT)
50P OT
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
FiPress
FiPress
___
For calling the SYSTEM adjustment operation
menu.
For calling the SETUP adjustment operation
menu.
___
FiPress
FiPress
FiPress
FiPress
FiPress
FiPress
For calling the PF1/function button assignment
operation menu.
For calling the PF1/function button assignment
operation menu.
For calling the PF2/function button assignment
operation menu.
For calling the PF2/function button assignment
operation menu.
For calling the 50-pin (input pin) assignment
operation menu.
For calling the 50-pin (output pin) assignment
operation menu.
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<ASSEMBLE>
The ASSEMBLE editing mode is selected on this menu
screen.
IN point
OUT point
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Automatic editing and manual editing
z When the editing mode has been selected (the
ASSEM
button is lighted), automatic editing or manual editing can
be performed even after the ASSEMBLE screen has been
exited.
z After the edit IN and OUT points have been registered (the
IN and OUT buttons are lighted), the tape can be
prerolled to an IN point or cued up to an IN or OUT point
even after the ASSEMBLE screen has been exited.
Function button/ Switching
item method
Toggle
Corresponding setup
menu item
Setting
Description of setting
F1
OFF
ON
___
For setting the editing mode to ON or OFF.
When the display is highlighted, the ASSEMBLE
editing mode is set to ON, and the ASSEM button
lights.
ASSEM
F2
___
F3
___
F4
___
F5
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
F6
___
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<INSERT>
The INSERT editing mode and editing channels are selected
on this menu screen.
Marker
OUT point
IN point
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
AUDIO IN point
AUDIO OUT point
Registering the edit points
After the edit IN and OUT points have been registered, the
IN and OUT buttons light.
Automatic editing and manual editing
INSERT
z When the editing mode has been selected (the
button is lighted), automatic editing or manual editing can
be performed even after the INSERT screen has been
exited.
z After the edit IN and OUT points have been registered (the
OUT
and IN and
buttons are lighted), the tape can be
prerolled to an IN point or cued up to an IN or OUT point
even after the INSERT screen has been exited.
Function button/ Switching
item method
Corresponding setup
menu item
Setting
Description of setting
F1
V
For setting the editing mode to ON or OFF and
selecting the editing channels.
F2
A5, A1
With the exception of the function button (F1), two
channels are allocated.
Use the SHIFT button to move the marker up or
down, and while specifying the channels, press the
function buttons to select them. Pressing the SHIFT
button on other screens serves a different purpose
(screen switching) from its use here.
F3
A6, A2
F4
A7, A3
Toggle
___
___
F5
A8, A4
F6
TC, CUE
For setting the editing mode to ON or OFF.
When one of the channel displays is highlighted, the
INSERT editing mode is set to ON, and the INSERT
button lights.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<SETUP MENU/SYSTEM MENU>
When the SETUP MENU or SYSTEM MENU opera-tion
menu is selected, a menu list appears on the monitor, and
the respective items can be set.
Settings
1 Selecting the menu items
Select the menu item by turning the ADJ dial. (The
cursor is moved down when the dial is turned clockwise
and up when it is turned counter-clockwise.)
z Forward or reverse page scrolling (SETUP menu only)
The menu list is organized by category, and the pages
can be scrolled in the forward or reverse direction on a
category by category basis.
SETUP menu
Change mark
F1
F2
(: PREV) /
(; NEXT)
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
<Note>
The screen may continue to scroll for a few moments
after the ADJ dial has been turned.
SYSTEM menu
Change mark
2 Changing the settings
1. In the menu item selection status, press the ADJ dial.
At this time, the setting of the menu item indicated by
the menu item selection cursor blinks on the monitor
2. Turn the ADJ dial to select the setting. (Turn it
clockwise to move up through the settings and
counterclockwise to move down through the settings.)
When the ADJ dial is pressed again, the menu item
selection status is restored.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Monitor display menu
Item selection cursor
Item number
<Notes>
Category
Setting number
z Setting items which have submenus
A submenu is opened by pressing the
SHIFT
but-
ton. The same operations as the ones described
above are then used to change the settings.
z Canceling individual items
When F3 (CANCEL) is pressed, the setting opera-
tion is canceled, and the item selection status is
restored.
3 Entering settings (After a setting has been entered,
Setting
the menu operation is forcibly exited.)
Item name
Item number
Press F5 (SET) to enter a setting.
4 Exiting the menu operation
When the F6 (EXIT) button is pressed in the menu item
selection status, the menu operation is exited, and the
original operation screen is restored.
However, if the F6 (EXIT) button is pressed after a
setting has been changed without that setting having
been entered, a confirmation message will be displayed.
Confirmation message
Confirmation item
Description of setting
EXIT confirmation
EXIT?
F3:CANCEL
F5:SET(and EXIT)
F6:EXIT(without SET)
When an attempt has been made to exit
the menu operation after a setting has
been changed without that setting
having been entered
<Note>
The “!” mark appears at the bottom left of the screen when a
setting has been changed.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<SETUP MENU/SYSTEM MENU> (continued)
Flow of setting changes
Press the ADJ dial.
Press SHIFT.
Submenu
Change the setting
Turn the ADJ dial.
F + F4 (item reset)
Turn the ADJ dial.
F + F4 (item reset)
Open the screen.
Select the menu
item
Close the screen.
F6 (EXIT)
Change the setting
Press the ADJ dial.
Turn the ADJ dial.
F + F4 (item reset),
F + F5 (SET)
SETUP MENU function buttons
Function button/ Switching
item method
Press
Corresponding setup
Setting
Description of setting
menu item
F1
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the reverse
direction.
↑ PREV
F2
Press
Press
Press
Press
Press
___
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the forward
direction.
↓ NEXT
F3
___
___
___
___
___
___
CANCEL
F4
RESET
For resetting an item (while a setting is being
changed).
For entering what has been set.
F5
SET
F6
EXIT
For exiting the special menu (and transferring to the
original menu). (Confirmation message provided)
F1 (SHIFT)
F2 (SHIFT)
F3 (SHIFT)
F4 (SHIFT)
F5 (SHIFT)
F6 (SHIFT)
___
___
SYSTEM MENU function buttons
Function button/ Switching
Corresponding setup
menu item
Setting
Description of setting
item
method
F1
___
___
___
___
F2
___
F3
CANCEL
F4
RESET
F5
SET
F6
EXIT
F1 (SHIFT)
F2 (SHIFT)
F3 (SHIFT)
F4 (SHIFT)
F5 (SHIFT)
F6 (SHIFT)
___
Press
Press
Press
Press
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
For resetting an item (while a setting is being
changed).
For entering what has been set.
For exiting the special menu (and transferring to the
original menu). (Confirmation message provided)
___
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<FILE>
The current setting information, including the SETUP menu
contents, can be provided with titles and either saved in or
loaded from the backup memory in one of 4 variations.
Settings
1 Selecting the memory target
SHIFT
Press the
button.
F
The operation target switches alternately between VTR
MEMORY C and VTR MEMORY to 4 .
When F1 (FILE) is pressed while the
button is held
1
down on the <MENU> screen, the following function menu is
displayed.
2 Selecting the operation file in the selected memory
The number of the currently selected file is highlighted
on the display. When the ADJ dial is turned, the
highlighting moves to the left or right, enabling operation
files to be selected.
Memory selection cursor
Memory name
3 Transferring files between memories
After selecting the operation file, press F2 (LOAD).
The contents of files selected in VTR MEMORY
1
to
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
4
can be transferred to VTR MEMORY C .
File title (VTR)
When
F
is selected and F2 (LOAD) is pressed, the
factory setting mode is established.
Alternatively, when F3 (SAVE) is pressed, the contents
of a file in VTR MEMORY C can be transferred to a file
File status (VTR)
File title (VTR)
selected in VTR MEMORY
1
to 4 .
(The titles are also transferred at the same time.)
File number
(VTR)
File number
(VTR)
4 Editing the title of the selected file
C
Press the ADJ dial after selecting the operation file.
The first digit of the title display area is highlighted, and
the file title can be edited.
z This VTR comes with VTR MEMORY
current settings (*) and VTR MEMORY
storing these settings as a backup.
for storing the
1
4
to
for
z To input a number, press the number keys.
z To input letters, tap the numbers keys until the letter
z Each VTR MEMORY can be provided with a title.
z Data can be saved and loaded and titles can be copied
C
1
to be input appears while holding down the
button.
F
between VTR MEMORY
and VTR MEMORY
to
4
.
z More than one letter is allocated to each number key.
z Turn the ADJ dial to move from one digit to the next in
the title display area.
z The file locking facility for preventing data from being
1
4
overwritten can be engaged for VTR MEMORY
to
.
z To enter the title, press the ADJ dial again.
*
The term “settings” used here refers to all the settings
on the setup menus excluding the SYSTEM menu, what
has been registered in the PF1 and PF2 menu items,
and the contents of some of the function buttons.
<Notes>
z When the display screen has been switched or the
C button has been pressed during title editing, the
editing enable status is canceled, and the setting
becomes invalid.
Name of memory
area
Initial title (up to 8
characters)
z A space can be input by pressing the F button and
VTR MEMORY C
VTR MEMORY 1
VTR MEMORY 2
VTR MEMORY 3
VTR MEMORY 4
CURRENT
USER1
USER2
USER3
USER4
3
button.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
Settings
5 File overwrite inhibit facility
It is possible to lock the overwrite inhibit facility for
individual files in VTR MEMORY
1
to 4 . Select the
file to be locked, and press F5 (LOCK) to lock it.
If F5 (LOCK) is pressed again, the facility is unlocked.
The locked or unlocked mode is displayed in the file
status.
[±: Unlocked status, µ: locked status]
Function button/ Switching
item method
Press
Corresponding setup
menu item
Setting
Description of setting
Refer to the setup menu.
F1
OFF
A02
P. LOAD
P.ON LOAD
USER1
USER2
USER3
USER4
F2
LOAD<
F3
SAVE>
F4
___
F5
LOCK
Press
Press
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
For downloading data to the current file.
For downloading data to the backup file.
___
Press
___
For locking the backup file.
F6
EXIT
___
___
F1 (SHIFT)
F2 (SHIFT)
F3 (SHIFT)
F4 (SHIFT)
F5 (SHIFT)
F6 (SHIFT)
___
___
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<PF1/PF2>
Up to 24 frequently used setup menu items can be
registered. The items are registered on the function
menus shown below. (No settings have been registered
before the VTR leaves the factory.)
6 Saving the settings in a PF registration file
To save what has been set in the function buttons in a PF
registration file, press F5 (SET).
If F6 (EXIT) is pressed without the settings having been
saved, the settings will be canceled.
To display one of the function menus, press F1 (PF1 FT),
F2 (PF1 BK), F3 (PF2 FT) or F4 (PF2 BK) while holding
F
When menu items are registered, they can be called
simply by pressing the PF1 or PF2 direct menu button.
When PF1 is pressed :
down the
button on the <MENU SHIFT> screen.
Selection marker
Registered menu number
<PF1 FT>
PF1
SHIFT
When
<PF1 BK>
When
is pressed after pressing
is pressed :
:
Menu name
PF2
<PF2 FT>
PF2
SHIFT
When
is pressed after pressing
:
<PF2 BK>
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Item selection cursor
Item number
Clearing the menu items
1 Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker, and
F1
F6
whose menu
select one of the function buttons
items are to be cleared.
to
Category
Setting
number
F4
2 Press
(RESET). The registered menu number and
name displays will now go blank.
To clear the menu items from other function buttons,
repeat steps 1 and 2 above.
3 To save what has been set in the function buttons in a
F5
PF registration file, press
(SET).
Setting
F6
4 If
(EXIT) is pressed without the settings having
Item name
Item number
been saved, the above settings will be canceled.
Clearing all the function button settings
F
Press F4 (RESET) while holding down the
the registered menu number and name displays will now go
blank.
button. All
Registration
All the contents of the PF registration file are cleared. (They
cannot be restored.)
1 Selecting the function buttons
Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker, and
F1
F6
into which
select one of the function buttons
to
the menu items are to be registered.
2 Entering the function button
Press the ADJ dial.
The display of the function button entered is highlighted.
3 Selecting menu items
Turn the ADJ dial, and select the menu item for the
function button which was selected in step 1 above.
4 Entering the menu items.
Press the ADJ dial.
The target of the ADJ dial operation returns to the front
panel. Whatever was selected in step 3 above is
displayed for the registered menu number and name.
5 To select a menu item for another function button,
repeat steps 1 to 4 above.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<PF1/PF2> (continued)
Flow of function button registration
Press the ADJ dial.
Open the screen.
Select the function
button to be registered.
Select the menu items.
Close the screen.
F6 (EXIT)
Turn the ADJ dial.
Press the ADJ dial.
F3 (cancel)
Turn the ADJ dial.
F1 (forward page scroll)
F2 (reverse page scroll)
F4 (one button reset)
F + F4 (all buttons reset)
F5 (settings entered)
PF1/PF2 function buttons
Function button/ Switching
Corresponding setup
menu item
Setting
Description of setting
item
method
F1
: PREV
F2
;NEXT
F3
CANCEL
F4
RESET
Press
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the reverse
direction.
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the forward
direction.
Press
Press
Press
FiPress
Press
Press
___
For releasing the menu item selection status.
For clearing one button: what has been selected for the
pin by the individual reset selection marker is cleared.
For clearing all the buttons: what has been registered in all
the pins is deleted from the PF registration files.
F5
SET
___
___
___
___
___
___
For entering the settings. (No confirmation message
provided)
For exiting the special menu (and transferring to the
original menu). (Confirmation message provided)
___
F6
EXIT
F1 (SHIFT)
F2 (SHIFT)
F3 (SHIFT)
F4 (SHIFT)
F5 (SHIFT)
F6 (SHIFT)
___
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<PF1/PF2> (continued)
PF1/PF2 function button names
When SETUP menu items have been registered in the function buttons, the names of these function buttons are displayed as
set forth in the table below.
Setup menu Name of setup menu
Setup menu Name of setup menu
Function button name
Function button name
item No.
item
item No.
item
000
P-ROLL TIME
LOCAL ENA
TAPE TIMER
REMAIN SEL
SYNCHRONIZE
SUPER
DISPLAY SEL
CHARA H-POS
CHARA V-POS
CHARA TYPE
MONI CONTROL
CU-ROLL TIME
AUTO STEP
SYS FORMAT
PB FORMAT
FORMAT SEL
HD FREQUENCY
OUT REF
PREROL
L ENA
TIMER
131
PAGE MODE
ROTA MODE
KEY BEEP
ALARM BEEP
OUTPUT
PAGE
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
015
020
022
023
030
031
132
133
134
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
ROTATE
KEY BP
AL BP
OUTPUT
VOLUME
A UNI
CAS LT
TC IN
F LCD
REMAIN
SYNCR
SUPER
DISPLY
C HPOS
C VPOS
C TYPE
MONI C
CU-ROL
STEP
SYS FT
PB FT
FMT SL
HD FRQ
OUTREF
VOLUME
AUDIO UNITY
CASSTT LIGHT
TC INPUT
FRONT LCD
SAVER DISP
SAVER
200
202
204
205
206
207
208
209
212
PARA RUN
ID SEL
RS232C SEL
BAUD RATE
DATA LENGTH
STOP BIT
PARITY
RETURN ACK
MASTER PORT
PR RUN
ID SEL
RS232C
BAUD R
DATA L
ST BIT
PARITY
RET AK
MSTR P
100
101
102
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
118
119
SEARCH ENA
SHTL MAX
SEARCH
STL MX
F/R MX
REF AL
AT EE
FF.REW MAX
REF ALARM
AUTO EE SEL
EJECT EE SEL
EE MODE SEL
PLAY DELAY
CAP.LOCK
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
320
321
322
323
324
IN/OUT DEL
NEGA FLASH
CONFI EDIT
AUD EDIT IN
AUD EDIT OUT
AUTO ENTRY
CF ADJ SEL
AFTER CUE-UP
VAR FWD MAX
VAR REV MAX
JOG FWD MAX
JOG REV MAX
POSTROLL TM
CLICK POINT
EDIT RPLCE1
EDIT RPLCE2
EDIT RPLCE3
EDIT RPLCE4
EDIT RPLCEC
IO DEL
NEGA F
CONFI
AUD I
AUD O
EJ EE
EE MD
PL DLY
CAPSTN
AT REW
MEM ST
FRZ MD
R INH
INH LP
EJ SW
EJ LP
AT ENT
CF ADJ
AF CUP
V F MX
V R MX
J F MX
J R MX
POSROL
CLK PT
RPLCE1
RPLCE2
RPLCE3
RPLCE4
RPLCEC
AUTO REW
MEMORY STOP
FRZ MODE SEL
REC INH
REC INH LAMP
EJECT SW INH
EJECT LAMP
SP MODE INH
CONFI REC
SP MD
CNFI R
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<PF1/PF2> (continued)
Setup menu Name of setup menu
Setup menu Name of setup menu
Function button name
Function button name
item No.
item
item No.
item
400
STILL TIMER
STILL
638
IN U/C MODE
I U/C RESP H
I U/C RESP V
I U/C ENH H
I U/C ENH V
IN BLK LINE
STYLE
HUE STYLE (SD)
Y LVL (HD)
Pb LVL (HD)
Pr LVL (HD)
BK LVL (HD)
Y LVL (SD)
Pb LVL (SD)
Pr LVL (SD)
BK LVL (SD)
V LEVEL
C LEVEL
HUE (AJ-HD1800P)
C PHASE (AJ-HD1800E) C PH (AJ-HD1800E)
SETUP LVL (AJ-HD1800P) SUP LV (AJ-HD1800P)
BK LVL (AJ-HD1800E) BK LV (AJ-HD1800E)
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR LEVEL
CONTRAST
BACKLIGHT
BLK CLIP
CC (F1) BLANK
CC (F2) BLANK
VO SETUP (HD)
(Only AJ-HD1800P)
VO SETUP (SD)
IUC MD
IUC RH
IUC RV
IUC EH
IUC EV
I BK L
STYLE
HUE S
Y HD
Pb HD
Pr HD
BK HD
Y SD
401
402
403
SRC PROTECT
DRUM STDBY
STOP PROTECT
SRC PT
DRUM
STP PT
639
640
641
642
643
650
651
653
654
655
656
658
659
660
661
662
663
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
VITC BLANK
VITC POS-1
VITC POS-2
TCG MODE
RUN MODE
TCG REGEN
REGEN MODE
TC SOURCE
BINARY GP
PHASE CORR
TCG CF FLAG
DF MODE
TC OUT REF
VITC OUT
HD EMBD VITC
HD EMBD LTC
TC OUT ADV
TCG OUT
VI BLK
VI PS1
VI PS2
TCG MD
RUN MD
TCG RG
REG MD
TC SRC
BINARY
P CORR
TG CFF
DF MOD
TC REF
VITC O
ENBD V
ENBD L
TC ADV
TCG O
Pb SD
Pr SD
BK SD
V LV
C LV
HUE (AJ-HD1800P)
664
665
670
671
672
673
676
680
681
BRIGHT
COLOR
CNTRST
BACK L
B CLIP
CC1 BK
CC2 BK
VOS HD
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
632
636
VIDEO IN SEL
VIDEO INT SG
SDI IN MODE
V-MUTE SEL
FREEZE SEL
INTERPOLATE
SD MON O SEL
V_FILTER
DOWNCON MODE
UPCON MODE
D/C RESP H
D/C RESP V
U/C RESP H
U/C RESP V
D/C ENH H
D/C ENH V
U/C ENH H
U/C ENH V
1080i>HD_OUT
720p>HD_OUT
SD>HD_OUT
VID IN
INT SG
SDI IN
V-MUTE
FRZ SL
INTPLT
SD MOS
V_FLTR
DW CON
UP CON
D/C RH
D/C RV
U/C RH
U/C RV
D/C EH
D/C EV
U/C EH
U/C EV
1080HO
720pHO
SD HO
682
683
(Only AJ-HD1800P)
VOS SD
(Only AJ-HD1800P)
(Only AJ-HD1800P)
EDH (SD)
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
695
EDH SD
ESR SD
CCR SD
SDI IX
CC REC
CMP MD
UM REC
UM GEN
UM POS
GM SL
ESR MODE (SD)
CCR MODE (SD)
SDI INDEX O
CC REC
COMP MODE
UMID REC
UMID GEN
UMID POS
GAMMA SEL
BLANK LINE
BK L
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<PF1/PF2> (continued)
Setup menu Name of setup menu
Setup menu Name of setup menu
Function button name
Function button name
item No.
item
item No.
item
700
CH1 IN LV
CH2 IN LV
CH3 IN LV
CH4 IN LV
A1 ILV
A2 ILV
A3 ILV
A4 ILV
751
ANA CH2 SEL
ANA CH3 SEL
ANA CH4 SEL
SD SDI CH1 SL
SD SDI CH2 SL
SD SDI CH3 SL
SD SDI CH4 SL
JOG PROC
AA2 SL
AA3 SL
AA4 SL
SSA1SL
SSA2SL
SSA3SL
SSA4SL
JOG P
DV ATT
R PTMT
A INSG
A RC
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
CUE IN LV
AC ILV
A1 OLV
A2 OLV
A3 OLV
A4 OLV
AC OLV
ML OLV
MR OLV
MONI O
A1 IN
A2 IN
A3 IN
A4 IN
A5 IN
A6 IN
A7 IN
A8 IN
DIN 12
DIN 34
DIN 56
DIN 78
REC A1
REC A2
REC A3
REC A4
REC A5
REC A6
REC A7
REC A8
RECCUE
PB FD
CH1 OUT LV
CH2 OUT LV
CH3 OUT LV
CH4 OUT LV
CUE OUT LV
MONIL OUT LV
MONIR OUT LV
MONI OUT
CH1 IN SEL
CH2 IN SEL
CH3 IN SEL
CH4 IN SEL
CH5 IN SEL
CH6 IN SEL
CH7 IN SEL
CH8 IN SEL
D IN SEL12
D IN SEL34
D IN SEL56
D IN SEL78
REC CH1
DV PB ATT
REC PT MUTE
AUDIO INT SG
AUD RATE CON
METER SCALE
(Only AJ-HD1800P)
M SCL
(Only AJ-HD1800P)
763
776
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
REF LEVEL
REF LV
IMP A1
IMP A2
IMP A3
IMP A4
IMP C
IN IMP CH1SL
IN IMP CH2SL
IN IMP CH3SL
IN IMP CH4SL
IN IMP CUE SL
CUE REC VOL
CUE PB VOL
CR VOL
CP VOL
880
882
883
886
890
891
892
894
895
896
899
DIF SPEED
DIF IN CH
DF SPD
DF ICH
DF OCH
DF CFG
DF AO
DF DVA
DF CMD
HD DO
DIF OUT CH
DIF CONFIG
DIF AUD OUT
DIF DV AUDIO
DIF SIG CMD
HD>DIF OUT
50M>DIF OUT
25M>DIF OUT
DIF SUPER
REC CH2
REC CH3
REC CH4
REC CH5
REC CH6
REC CH7
REC CH8
REC CUE
50M DO
25M DO
DF SPR
PB FADE
A02
P.ON LOAD
P.LOAD
HD EMBD AUD
SD EMBD AUD
MONI MIX
HDEM A
SDEM A
M MIX
CH1 CUE SEL
CH2 CUE SEL
CH3 CUE SEL
CH4 CUE SEL
CH5 CUE SEL
CH6 CUE SEL
CH7 CUE SEL
CH8 CUE SEL
MONI CH SEL
MON AUTO SEL
MONI SEL INH
AUDIO PB VR
ANA CH1 SEL
A1 CSL
A2 CSL
A3 CSL
A4 CSL
A5 CSL
A6 CSL
A7 CSL
A8 CSL
MON CH
MON AT
MS INH
APB VR
AA1 SL
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<CARD>
Different kinds of settings and information can be stored or
Warning message 1
A warning message about the SD memory card is displayed.
NO CARD
No memory card is inserted.
UNFORMATTED CARD
F2
retrieved from an SD memory card. When
pressed on the <MENU> screen while the
down, the function menu shown below is displayed.
(CARD) is
button is held
F
[MENU/ERROR LOG/MULTI CUE]
The SD memory card is not formatted.
Memory selection cursor
Warning message 2
PROTECT!
Memory name
SD memory card protection is turned [ON].
ACCESS!
This is displayed for the editing operation of F1 (FORMAT),
F2 (SAVE), F4 (DELETE), F5 (LOCK), and the file title
(CARD).
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
File status (CARD)
No storage files are
present.
Storage files are present. The target file is in the
(Unlocked status) unlocked status.
Storage files are present. The target file is in the
(Locked status) locked status.
File status (VTR)
_ _ _ _ _
Warning message 1
Blank
○
SYSTEM MENU/SETUP MENU/
50PIN ASSIGN
●
File title (VTR)
File title (CARD)
File number
(CARD)
File number
(VTR)
To insert an SD memory card
Insert an SD memory card (optional) into the SD memory
card slot on the front left side; make sure the card’s notch is
up.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
SD memory card slot
File status (CARD)
File status (VTR)
Warning message 2
MULTI CUE
<Note>
Insert the SD memory card after confirming that the direction
of the SD memory card is correct. If the card does not slide
smoothly into the slot but meets some resistance, the card
may be upside down or the direction may be incorrect. Do
not forcibly push the card into the slot, rather confirm the
direction again, and then insert the card correctly.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
ERROR LOG
To eject the SD memory card
After confirming that “ACCESS!” is not displayed on Warning
Message 2, push the SD memory card into the unit further.
When the SD memory card is ejected from the slot, remove
the card.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
<Notes>
Notes on the following points for using and
storing the card.
z The available capacity on an SD memory card is in the
range from 8 MB to 2 GB.
z Do not use or store the card in a hot, humid place.
z Do not expose the card to water.
z An SD memory card must be formatted on the unit.
z An SRAM card cannot be used.
z Prevent electrification of the card.
z An SDHC memory card cannot be used.
z When “ACCESS!” is displayed on the Warning Message 2,
the unit is accessing the SD memory card. Do not remove
the SD memory card while it is being accessed.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<CARD> (continued)
[MENU/ERROR LOG/MULTI CUE]
Settings
1 Selecting the targeted memory
SD Memory
card data
arrangement
Lock
VTR memory data layout Lock
SHIFT
Press the
button
Targets shift alternately between the SD memory card
and VTR MEMORY.
SETUP
MENU
1
Current
No
SETUP MENU
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
USER1 Yes
USER2 Yes
USER3 Yes
USER4 Yes
(what has been
registered for the
PF1, PF2 menu
items, contents of
some function but-
tons)
2 Selecting the operation files inside the selected
memory
Yes
←→
←→
←→
The number of the currently selected file is highlighted.
Turn the ADJ dial to select the file to be operated.
z For SYSTEM MENU, SETUP MENU and 50PIN
ASSIGN
The registration status indication for the SD memory
card shifts automatically by selecting either S
(SYSTEM MENU), C1234 (SETUP MENU), or P
(50PIN ASSIGN) for VTR MEMORY.
50 PIN
ASSIGN
Current Yes
50 PIN
ASSIGN
Yes
Yes
3 Transferring files between memories
z From VTR MEMORY to the SD memory card
SYSTEM
MENU
Current Yes
F2
First select the operation file, and then press
(SAVE).
z From the SD memory card to VTR MEMORY
SYSTEM
MENU
F3
After selecting the operation file, press
(LOAD).
<Notes>
z The title is also transferred at the same time.
z After transferring files to the VTR MEMORY side, the
storage process for files requires about 5 seconds.
To turn off the power after transferring files, wait
about 5 seconds or more after transferring the files
and then turn off the power.
SD Memory
card data
arrangement
Lock
VTR memory data layout Lock
Current No
MULTI CUE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4 Editing the title of a selected file
First select the operation file, and then press the ADJ
dial.
Yes
MULTI CUE
←→
←→
The first digit of the title display area is highlighted,
indicating that the file title can now be edited.
z To input a number, press the number keys.
z To input letters, tap the numbers keys until the letter
to be input appears while holding down the
button.
z More than one letter is allocated to each number key.
z Press the ADJ dial to move from one digit to the next
on the title display area.
ERROR LOG 1
Current
No
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F
Yes
ERROR LOG
z To enter the title, press the ADJ dial again.
<Notes>
z The SD memory card is capable of storing and retrieving
the settings from the SETUP MENU (Current, USER1 to
USER4)/SYSTEM MENU, the registered contents of
50PIN ASSIGN, the registered points of MULTI CUE, and
the contents of the ERROR LOG.
z Titles can be provided for all the data files, and when the
files are saved or loaded, the titles are also copied at the
same time.
z When the display screen has been switched or the
C button has been pressed during title editing, the
editing enable status is canceled, and the setting
becomes invalid.
z A space can be input by pressing the F button and
3
button.
z The file lock prevents the files on an SD memory card from
being overwritten.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<CARD> (continued)
5 File overwrite inhibit facility
The file lock prevents the files on an SD memory card
from being overwritten.
z Locking a file
Select the file to be locked, and press F5 (LOCK).
z Unlocking a file
Press F5 (LOCK) again.
<Note>
The locked or unlocked status is displayed in the file
status.
[±: Unlocked status, µ: locked status]
Function button/
item
Switching
method
Corresponding setup menu
item
Setting
Description of setting
Formatting SD memory cards
F1
FORMAT
F2
SAVE<
F3
LOAD>
F4
DELETE
F5
LOCK
F6
EXIT
F1 (SHIFT)
F2 (SHIFT)
F3 (SHIFT)
F4 (SHIFT)
F5 (SHIFT)
F6 (SHIFT)
___
F+Press
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
Press
Press
F+Press
Press
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
Transferring data to SD memory cards
Transferring data from SD memory cards
Deleting SD memory cards
Locking SD memory card files/VTR MEMORY
files
___
___
___
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>
Using the front panel controls and on-screen menus,
functions are registered into the input pins of the parallel
remote (50PIN) connector and the statuses are registered
into its output pins.
Pins in which functions can be registered
IN pins: Pins 6 to 20, 22, 23, 25
OUT pins: Pin 21, 24, pins 32 to 46, 48
All other pins are reserved and cannot be changed.
F
F5
F6
(50P OT) is pressed while the
When
(50P IN) or
button is held down on the <MENU SHIFT> menu, the
function menu shown below appears, and functions can be
registered or deleted.
IN pins
OUT pins
21
24
Range of pins to
which any items can
be assigned
Selection marker
26 <Power>
27 REC
28 PLAY
29 FF
Registered item name
1
2
REC
Registered
value
PLAY
FF
3
4
REW
STOP
30 REW
31 STOP
32
5
6
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
:
|
:
Range of pins to
which any items can
be assigned
|
Item selection cursor
Item number
Range of pins to
which any items can
be assigned
;
20
22
23
25
;
46
48
Category
Setting
number
47 <GND>
49 <GND>
50 <GND>
Items which can be registered in the input and
output pins
Items identical to the setup menu items can be registered in
both the input and output pins. In addition, there are a set of
special items can be also registered in the input pins and
another set for the output pins.
Item number
Item name
Item number
Registered item names
<Note>
Setup menu items and 50PIN special menu items can be
registered in the parallel remote connector pins, and the
names of these menu items are displayed.
System menu and submenu items cannot be registered.
Registration in input
pins
Registration in output
pins
Item no.
Registered values
One setting for the registered menu item is displayed in each
of the pins.
When active signals are input to the IN pins in which the
setup menu items mentioned above have been registered,
the settings for the registered menu items take effect inside
the VTR.
When the settings for the registered menu items tally with
the registered values, active signals are output from the
registered OUT pins.
000
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
B00
C00
Setup menu list
Special IN menu list
<No display>
<No display>
Special OUT menu list
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN> (continued)
Resetting all the items and values
F
Registering functions in the input pins/Active
inputs
Registering functions in the output pins/Active
outputs
F4
(RESET) while holding down the
Press
button. All
the registered item names and registered values are now set
to the factory settings. (These settings cannot be restored.)
Special IN menu list
1 Selecting the 50-pin connector pins
Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker and
select the pin of the 50-pin connector into which the
menu item is to be registered.
No.
SUPER
DISPLAY
Description of setting
Functions not featured on the setup menua
B00
STBY ON
B01
STBY OFF
For transferring to the STANDBY ON mode.
2 Entering the 50-pin connector pins
Press the ADJ dial.
For transferring to the STANDBY OFF mode.
The entered 50-pin connector pin display is highlighted.
B02
STBY
ONOFF
For alternately transferring to the STANDBY ON and
OFF mode.
3 Selecting the menu item
Turn the ADJ dial and select the menu item for the pin of
the 50-pin connector which was selected in step 1 above
B03
EJECT
For transferring to the EJECT mode.
B04
CUE
For prerolling the tape to the IN point when the IN
point has been registered; for prerolling the tape to
the current point when the IN point has not been reg-
istered.
4 Entering the menu item
Press the ADJ dial.
The on-screen setting display now blinks.
B05
For registering the edit IN point.
IN SET
B06
STILL
B07
5 Selecting the setting
For transferring to the still picture (STILL) mode.
The 9-pin connector functions.
Turn the ADJ dial and select the setting for the menu item
which was selected in step 3 above.
422 REM ON
B08
422 REM
OFF
The 9-pin connector does not function.
6 Entering the setting
Press the ADJ dial.
What is to be operated by the ADJ dial returns to the
front panel. Whatever was selected in step 3 is
displayed as the registered item name and whatever was
selected in step 5 is displayed as the registered value.
B09
TC EXT
For returning TC SOURCE to the previous EXT
mode.
(No switching occurs if the EXT mode is currently
established)
For switching TC SOURCE to INT and TCG MODE
B10
TC INT AUTO to AUTO.
7 To select menu items and settings for other 50-pin con-
B11
For switching TC SOURCE to EXT_L and TCG
MODE to REGEN.
nector pins, repeat steps 1 to 6.
TC EXT_L
REG
SRC PROTECT and STOP PROTECT settings switched
simultaneously
8 Saving the data in the 50-pin registration file
To save what has been set in the 50-pin connector in the
B20
For switching the tape protection mode operation to
half-loading in the event that the VTR has been left
standing in the STOP mode or the STILL mode while
any of the search modes (JOG/SHTL/SLOW) was
established.
F5
50-pin registration file, press
(SET).
(EXIT) is pressed without the above settings have
been saved, those settings will be canceled.
PROTECT
HALF
F6
If
B21
PROTECT
T-REL
For switching the tape protection mode operation to
tension release when the VTR has been left stand-
ing in the STOP mode or the STILL mode while any
of the search modes (JOG/SHTL/SLOW) was
established.
Clearing
1 Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker and
select the pin of the 50-pin connector whose menu item
is to be cleared.
UPCON MODE and DOWNCON MODE settings switched
simultaneously
B22
2 Press F4 (RESET). The registered item name and reg-
For switching the picture angle during down-
conversion to letter box and the picture angle
during up-conversion to the top/bottom cut status
in the vertical direction.
For switching the picture angle during down-
conversion to the side cut mode and the picture
angle during up-conversion to the side panel
mode.
istered value displays now go blank.
UD FIT H
3 To clear the menu items in other 50-pin connector pins,
B23
UD FIT-V
repeat steps 1 and 2.
4 To save what has been set in the 50-pin connector in
the 50-pin registration file, press F5 (SET).
B24
UD FIT-HV
For switching the picture angle during down-
conversion to the squeeze mode and the picture
angle during up-conversion to the stretch mode.
If F6 (EXIT) is pressed without the above settings have
been saved, those settings will be canceled.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN> (continued)
Special OUT menu list
No.
No.
SUPER
DISPLAY
C00
Description of setting
SUPER
DISPLAY
C29
Description of setting
Servo lock LED
EJECT status
EJECT
C01
STBY ON
C02
CUE
C03
SERVO
LOCK
C30
V UNITY
C31
STANDBY ON status
CUE-UP completed status
STILL status
Video UNITY LED
Audio UNITY LED
A UNITY
STILL
C04
PANEL STOP
Status in which the front panel STOP button is
pressed down
C05
PRE CTL
Status of whether to inhibit overwrite during normal
recording
C06
9-pin connector function status
422 REM ON
C07
REMOTE
C08
REC INH1
C09
REC INH2
C10
CAS INH1
50-pin connector function status
Recording inhibit status 1
Recording inhibit status 2
Tape recording inhibit status 1
Tape recording inhibit status 2
TC input status 1
C11
CAS INH2
C12
TC SRC1
C13
TC input status 2
TC SRC2
C14
DC1
C15
DC2
C16
DC3
C17
UC1
Down-conversion status 1
Down-conversion status 2
Down-conversion status 3
Up-conversion status 1
C18
UC2
Up-conversion status 2
C19
UD1
C20
UD2
C21
UD3
C22
Up-conversion/down-conversion status 1
Up-conversion/down-conversion status 2
Up-conversion/down-conversion status 3
Error status 0
ERR0
C23
Error status 1
ERR1
C24
Error status 2
ERR2
C26
CH GREEN
C27
CH AMBER
Channel condition green LED
Channel condition amber LED
Channel condition red LED
C28
CH RED
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN> (continued)
The statuses established by a multiple number of pins in the special OUT menu list are displayed. Pin status “1” signifies
“active low” and “0” signifies “open.”
Error statuses
Up-conversion down-conversion statuses
C22
C23
C24
C19 C20 C21
UD1 UD2 UD3
Down-conversion
status
Up-conversion
status
Error status
ERR0 ERR1 ERR2
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
SERVO NOT LOCKED (priority level 1)
SERVO LOCKED (priority level 4)
HIGH ERROR (amber) (priority level 3)
HIGH ERROR (red) (priority level 2)
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
Squeeze mode
Side cut mode
Stretch mode
Side panel mode
Top and bottom cut in
vertical direction
Letter box mode
1
1
1
Any other combination
TC input statuses
C12
C13
TC input status
TC SRC1 TC SRC2
0
0
1
0
1
0
External SLTC
External LTC
External SVITC (or external VITC with SD
input)
1
1
INT
Tape recording inhibit statuses
C10
CAS INH1
C11
CAS INH2
Tape recording inhibit status
0
0
0
1
Cassette recording enabled
Cassette accidental erasure pre-
vented
Recording inhibit statuses
C08
C09
Recording inhibit statuses
REC INH1 REC INH2
0
0
Overwriting prohibited during normal
recording
0
1
1
0
All recording onto cassette prohibited
Recording inhibit mode other than the 2
above modes
1
1
Recording onto cassette enabled
Down-conversion statuses
C14
DC1 DC2
C15
C16
DC3
Down-conversion status
Squeeze mode
Side cut modea
Letter box mode
14:9
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
13:9
Up-conversion statuses
C17 C18
UC1 UC2
Up-conversion status
0
0
1
0
1
0
Stretch mode
Side panel mode
Top and bottom cut in vertical direction
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN> (continued)
Flow of registration
Status in which selected
50-pin connector pin
menu item selection is
enabled
Turn the ADJ dial.
F1 (forward page scroll)
F2 (reverse page scroll)
Press the ADJ dial.
Open the
Status in which
registered 50-pin
connector pin
screen.
F3 (cancel)
Press the ADJ dial.
Close the
screen.
F6 (EXIT)
selection is enabled
Turn the ADJ dial.
F4 (one pin reset)
F i F4 (all pins reset)
F5 (settings entered)
Status in which
selected menu item
setting selection is
enabled
Turn the ADJ dial.
Press the ADJ dial.
F3 (cancel)
50P IN/OUT ASSIGN function buttons
Function button/ Switching
item method
Press
Corresponding setup
menu item
Setting
___
Description of setting
F1
___
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the forward direction.
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the reverse direction.
For releasing the menu item selection status.
:PREV
F2
;NEXT
F3
CANCEL
F4
RESET
Press
Press
Press
FiPress
Press
Press
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
For resetting one pin: what has been selected for the pin selected
by the individual reset selection marker is cleared.
For resetting all the pins: what has been registered in all the pins
is set to the factory settings and set in the 50-pin registration file.
For registering the file; all the function button settings are saved in
the 50-pin registration file.
For exiting the special menu (and transferring to the original
menu).
F5
SET
F6
EXIT
F1 (SHIFT)
F2 (SHIFT)
F3 (SHIFT)
F4 (SHIFT)
F5 (SHIFT)
F6 (SHIFT)
___
___
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function menus (continued)
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN> (continued)
50-pin assignment factory settings
Pin no.
1
I/O
Setting item
Pin no.
45
I/O
O
Setting item
LOCAL ENABLE STATUS
STANDBY ON STATUS
I
I
REC
PLAY
FF
2
46
O
3
I
47
GND
O
__
4
I
REW
STOP
__
48
5
I
49
GND
GND
6
I
50
__
7
I
__
“
” denotes that nothing is subject to control or to a status.
8
I
422 REMOTE ON
422 REMOTE OFF
LOCAL ENABLE
EJECT
9
I
<Notes>
z For a command, input TTL level signals; for an active low
edge, input an electrical signal of 100 ms or more.
z For a status, a maximum open collector and sink current of
6 mA is output.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
I
I
I
IN SET
I
REC INH ALL
REC INH PRE
LOCAL DISABLE
TC EXT
I
I
I
I
TC INT&TCG MODE AUTO
__
I
__
I
I
STNDBY ON/OFF
ERR0 STATUS
__
O
I
I
CUE
O
I
ERR1 STATUS
__
Power
supply
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
REC STATUS
PLAY STATUS
FF STATUS
REW STATUS
STOP STATUS
422 REMOTE STATUS
EJECT STATUS
ERR2 STATUS
TC SRC1 STATUS
TC SRC2 STATUS
__
__
REC INH1 STATUS
REC INH2 STATUS
CUE STATUS
REMOTE STATUS
__
PRE CTL DETECTED STATUS
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System menus
External encoder remote controller:
No./Item
Description of setting
Only adjustments of the external encoder remote
controller are performed.
05
For setting whether to perform the various
adjustments for the video output signals using this
VTR or using an external encoder remote controller.
0000 REMOTE
The various adjustments for the video output
signals are performed by an external encoder
remote controller.
This unit：
ENCODER
SEL
Only adjustments of the setup menu items are performed.
External encoder remote controller/this unit：
Adjustments can be performed from both the external
encoder remote controller and setup menus.
0001 LOCAL
The various adjustments for the video output
signals are performed using this VTR.
<Note>
0002
BOTH
Use the AJ-ER50, an optional accessory, as the external
encoder remote controller. However, its VIDEO PHASE and
SYNC PHASE controls will not work.
The various adjustments for the video output
signals are performed using both this VTR and
an external encoder remote controller.
<Notes>
When “CMPST” has been selected as the setup menu item
No.650 (STYLE) setting
z When an adjustment is made with the external
encoder remote controller, the new values are
reflected in the appropriate section of the Setup
Menu. The adjusted values are stored on the unit
approximately 5 seconds after making the
adjustment. To turn off the power after making
the adjustment with the external encoder remote
controller, wait approximately 5 seconds or more
after completion of the operation before turning
the power off.
z For the IEEE 1394 digital output, settings are
disabled in this menu.
For selecting what is to be controlled when the
video output level is to be adjusted by an
external encoder remote controller.
Setting
06:
Adjustment item
05:
662: V LEVEL
ENCODER
SEL
V LEVEL
CTRL
663: C LEVEL
664: HUE
665: SETUP LVL
REMOTE
LOCAL
BOTH
HD
SD
BOTH
HD
SD
BOTH
HD
SD
External encoder
remote controller
06
This unit
V LEVEL
CTRL
0000
HD
External encoder
remote controller/This
unit
The HD video output level can be adjusted.
0001
The SD video output level can be adjusted.
SD
BOTH
0002
BOTH
External encoder remote controller:
Both the HD and SD video output levels can be
adjusted.
<Note>
When [CMPST] is selected in Setup Menu No.
650 (STYLE), [BOTH] is selected be default
regardless of the settings for this item.
Only adjustments of the external encoder remote
controller are performed.
This unit:
Only adjustments of the setup menu items are performed.
External encoder remote controller/This unit:
Adjustments can be performed from both the external
encoder remote controller and setup menus.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
<Note>
Video output signal adjustments
Use the MT-2000 (manufactured by Musashi and
recommended by Panasonic) as the external encoder
remote controller. However, its VIDEO PHASE, SYNC
PHASE and SC PHASE controls will not work.
The control matrix for the adjustments is shown in the table
below.
Setting
06:
Adjustment item
05:
653: Y LVL (HD)
658: Y LVL (SD)
659: Pb LVL (SD)
660: PrVL (SD)
661: BK LVL (SD)
ENCODER
SEL
V LEVEL
CTRL
654: Pb LVL (HD)
655: Pr LVL (HD)
656: BK LVL (HD)
REMOTE
HD
External encoder
remote controller
No adjustments
possible
SD
No adjustments
possible
External encoder
remote controller
BOTH
External encoder
remote controller
External encoder
remote controller
LOCAL
BOTH
HD
SD
BOTH
HD
This unit
This unit
This unit
External encoder
remote controller/
this unit
SD
External encoder
remote controller/
this unit
This unit
BOTH
External encoder
remote controller/
This unit
External encoder
remote controller/
this unit
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System menus (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
12
18
For adjusting the SCH (Sub Carrier to
Horizontal) phase of the analog composite
output
For adjusting the HD SDI output system phase
in 13.5nS steps.
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.
SCH (SD)*DW
SYS H
(HD)*UP
SHIFT
Press
to move to the sub menu window. To
SHIFT
return from the sub menu window, press
again.
Submenu screen
<50Hz>
<25Hz(HD,SD)>
<50Hz(HD,SD)>
<59/60Hz>
<23/24Hz>
0000
:
2200
:
-2200
0000
:
2750
:
-2750
0000
:
2640
:
-2640
00
For adjusting the SCH phase in 90o steps
(The SC phase changes, and the H phase remains
unchanged.)
:
0
:
:
0
:
:
0
:
COARSE
4400
2200
5500
2750
5280
2640
0000
0
90
180
270
0001:
0002:
0003:
14
For adjusting the system phase of the analog
composite output and the SD SDI output
Variable range: +/- 180 degrees or more
j: Advance, i: Delay
<59/60Hz>
<23/24Hz>
SYS SC
(SD)*DW
01
For adjusting the SCH phase over a total
variable range of more than d45o.
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.
(The SC phase changes, and the H phase
remains unchanged.)
<50Hz>
<25Hz(HD,SD)>
<50Hz(HD,SD)>
0000
:
0115
:
FINE
0000
:
0108
:
-108
:
0
-115
:
0
0000
:
-32
:
:
:
0032
:
0064
0
:
32
0216
108
0230
115
<Note>
This is disabled for 60 Hz/24 Hz.
15
For adjusting the system phase of the analog
composite output
37nS step
VO SYS
j: Advance, i: Delay
H (SD)*DW
<59/60Hz,>
<23/24Hz>
<50Hz>
<25Hz(HD,SD)>
<50Hz(HD,SD)>
0000
:
-1716
0000
:
-1728
:
:
1716
:
0
:
1728
:
0
:
3432
1716
3456
1728
16
For adjusting the system phase of the SD SDI
output
37nS step
j: Advance, i: Delay
SD SYS
H (SD)*DW
<59/60Hz,>
<23/24Hz>
<50Hz>
<25Hz(HD,SD)>
<50Hz(HD,SD)>
0000
:
-1716
0000
:
-1728
:
:
1716
:
0
:
1728
:
0
:
3432
1716
3456
1728
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
*UP: This is for HD outputs (during HD tape playback or up-
conversion outputs).
*DW: This is for SD outputs (during SD tape playback or
down-conversion outputs).
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System menus (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
20
For adjusting the phase of the AUDIO output
with the VIDEO output
20.8 microsecond steps
26
For selecting the output whose HD output
phase is to be advanced by 90H in relation to
the SD output.
AV PHASE
HD SYS H ADV
－： The phase of audio output advances with
respect to image output.
0000
0H
Both the HD and SD signals are output in phase
with the HD and SD REF output signals.
＋： The phase of audio output delays with
respect to image output.
0001
90H
The HD signals are output at a phase advanced
by 90H from the SD output signals.
When the SD REF signal is input, the REF input
and SD output are in-phase, and when the HD
REF signal is input, the REF input and HD output
are inphase.
0000
:
0100
:
-100
:
0
:
0200
100
25
For selecting the system frequency.
<Notes>
z The audio signals and TC signal are output in
phase with the HD output.
z With the 720p format, there is a phase difference
of 120H between them.
SYSTEM
FREQ*1
0000
59/60
The 59.94 Hz or 60 Hz system frequency is
selected.
0001 50i/25P*2
The 50 Hz or 25 PsF system frequency is
selected.
At this setting, the 1080/25 PsF format signals
can be recorded and played back in the same
way as with the 1080/50i format.
30
For selecting whether to set or release the
system file lock mode.
MENU LOCK
0000
OFF
Lock released (changes enabled)
0001
ON
0002
23/24
Lock set (changes prohibited)
<Notes>
Even if [ON] is selected, the file is overwritten when
the system file is retrieved from an SD memory
card.
The 23.98 Hz or 24 Hz system frequency is
selected.
0003
The 25 Hz system frequency is selected.
However, SD SDI output and analog composite
output are delayed with respect to HD SDI output
by about one field.
25(HD)
1
* System switching
z Some of the system menu and setup menu items each have
different settings for different operation modes [59/60 Hz, 50 Hz,
23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD) and 50 Hz (HD or SD)]. These
settings are saved separately.
(This concerns those items whose settings were described for
each operation mode on the system menu and setup menu
tables.)
z Since this VTR becomes a playback-only unit when the 23/24
Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD) or 50 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been
selected, the functions relating to EE, recording and editing
are all set to the inhibited status. Neither is it possible to
select CTL in such a case.
(The related menus and function buttons are not displayed,
and operation is prohibited.)
For the instant when the tape begins to run at the 1k speed
such as when it starts playing from the STOP status, the
image is disrupted and the sound is muted for several
frames because the tape is being synchronized with the REF
input.
0004
25(SD)
The 25 Hz system frequency is selected.
However, the black signal is output from HD SDI
output.
0005
50(HD)
The 50 Hz system frequency is selected.
However, SD SDI output and analog composite
output are delayed with respect to HD SDI output
by about one field.
0006
50(SD)
The 50 Hz system frequency is selected.
However, the black signal is output from HD SDI
output.
59/60Hz mode
50Hz mode
A state selecting 0 (59/60)
A state selecting 1 (50i/25P)
A state selecting 2 (23/24)
23/24Hz mode
25Hz(HD) mode A state selecting 3 (25 (HD))
25Hz(SD) mode A state selecting 4 (25 (SD))
50Hz(HD) mode A state selecting 5 (50 (HD))
50Hz(SD) mode A state selecting 6 (50 (SD))
<Note>
For the procedure to shift the system frequency,
refer to page 112.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
2
* The asterisk denotes the factory setting for
AJ-HD1800E.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus
<BASIC>
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
000
For setting whether or not to synchronize the
phases between two decks.
For setting the preroll time. Any time from 0 to
30 seconds can be set in 1-second increments.
004*1
0000
OFF
P-ROLL TIME
0000
0s
SYNCHRONIZE
The phases are not synchronized. The edit
points will be off by several frames but editing will
be commenced more promptly.
:
:
0005
:
5s
:
0001
ON
0030
<Notes>
30s
The phases are synchronized. Error-free editing
can be performed.
For selecting whether or not to superimpose
the display of the time code or other data onto
the HD SDI MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and
VIDEO OUT3 connectors.
z During automatic editing (PREVIEW or AUTO
EDIT), no operations are performed if the preroll
time is set to 0 seconds.
z If the phases are to be synchronized between
two decks for editing as per the setup menu item
No.004 (SYNCHRONIZE) setting, set the preroll
time to at least 2 seconds.
005
SUPER
0000
OFF
The time code or other data is not displayed.
0001
ON
001
For selecting the transport system buttons
which can be operated on the front panel in the
REMOTE mode.
The time code or other data is displayed.
<Note>
z The 1394 output follows the settings in Setup
Menu No. 899 (DIF SUPER).
LOCAL ENA
0000
DIS
No buttons can be operated.
z When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD) mode, or
50 Hz (HD) mode is selected in System Menu
No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), supers, such as time
codes, are not displayed on the SD SDI
MONITOR/VIDEO OUT 3 connector. When the
25 Hz (SD) mode or 50 Hz (SD) mode is
selected, supers, such as time codes, are not
displayed on the HD SDI MONITOR connector.
For selecting the time code and other displays
to be superimposed onto the HD SDI MONITOR,
SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO OUT3 connectors.
In the following descriptions, [DATA] refers to the
0001
ST&EJ
Only the STOP and EJECT buttons can be oper-
ated.
0002
ENA
ll the buttons except for the RECORDER and
PLAYER buttons can be operated.
<Note>
The following buttons and dials function at all
times regardless of this setting:
Audio input/output level control dials, audio
channel selector buttons, number keys, function
buttons, direct menu button, ASSEM button,
INSERT button, ADJ dial, headphone volume
control dial, MONITOR SELECT button, METER
(FULL/FINE) selector switch, REMOTE button.
006
DISPLAY SEL
values for CTL/TC/UB selected in F3 (TC/CTL).
0000
TIME
Only data are displayed.
0001
T&STA
002*1
For selecting the 12- or 24-hour system for the
CTL counter display.
Data and operating conditions are displayed.
0002 T&S&M
Data, operating conditions, and the mode are
displayed
0000
12h
TAPE TIMER
12-hour system display
0001
24h
0003
T&RT
24-hour system display
Data and REC TIME are displayed.
0004 T&YMD
Data and REC DATE (Year/Month/Day) are
displayed.
0005 T&MDY
Data and REC DATE (Month/ Day/Year) are
displayed.
0006 T&DMY
Data and REC DATE (Day/Month/Year) are
displayed.
003
For selecting whether or not to display REMAIN
(remaining tape time) on the superimposed
display of the HD SDI MONITOR, SD SDI
MONITOR and VIDEO OUT3 connectors.
REMAIN SEL
0000
OFF
The remaining tape time is not displayed.
0001
2L
The remaining tape time is displayed on the sec-
ond line.
0002
1L
0007
T&UB
The remaining tape time is displayed on the first
line.
Data and user bits are displayed.
However, when UB is selected in
F3
(TC/CTL)
0003
R/TTL
of the HOME menu, the time code is displayed
immediately after user bits.
The remaining tape time is displayed on the first
line, and the total tape time is displayed on the
second line.
0008
T&CTL
Data and CTL are displayed.
However, when CTL is selected in
<Notes>
F3
(TC/CTL)
z When setting 1 (2L) has been selected, the
remaining tape time is not displayed if 0 (TIME)
is selected as the setup menu item No.006
(DISPLAY SEL) setting.
z When setting 3 (R/TTL) has been selected, the
remaining tape time is not displayed if 0 (TIME)
is selected as the setup menu item No.006
(DISPLAY SEL) setting.
of the HOME menu, the time code is displayed
immediately after CTL data.
0009
T&T
Data and the time code are displayed.
<Notes>
z When setting 2 (T&S&M) is selected, an error
message appears if a warning or error has
occurred.
z REC TIME and REC DATE are displayed only
during DV or DVCAM format playback. The
operation mode is displayed when the DVCPRO
HD-LP, DVCPRO HD, DVCPRO50 or DVCPRO
format is used.
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<BASIC> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
007
For setting the character position in the
horizontal direction for superimposed
indications, such as time codes for HD SDI
MONITOR/SD SDI MONITOR/VIDEO OUT3
connectors and superimposed indications from
the IEEE 1394 digital interface.
011
For setting the preroll time in the MULTI CUE
mode.
Any time from 0 to 15 seconds can be set in 1-
CHARA
H-POS
CU-ROLL
TIME
second increments.
0000
:
0s
:
0000
0
:
0005
:
5s
:
:
0006
:
0037
<Note>
6
:
37
0015
15s
015
For selecting the save processing to be
conducted when the memory capacity, which
enables up to 99 warning messages to be
saved, has been exceeded while the error log
function is operating.
AUTO
STEP
When this menu item has been set, the displays
are output to the HD SDI MONITOR, SD SDI
MONITOR and VIDEO OUT3 connectors in the
DISPLAY SEL status even when the SUPER OFF
setting is established. However, if the menu has
been exited, the SUPER OFF or ON setting is
followed.
0000
OFF
99 messages are set as the upper limit, and any
more warning messages which subsequently
occur are not saved in the memory.
Furthermore, CHARA TYPE is output as per the
menu setting.
0001
ON
99 messages are saved, and the next warning
message that has subsequently occurred is
saved as No.99. The warning messages already
saved are each shifted down by one number in
succession.
For selecting the recording and playback
formats including HD REF signals
008
For setting the character position in the vertical
direction for superimposed indications, such as
time codes for HD SDI MONITOR/SD SDI
MONITOR/VIDEO OUT3 connectors and
superimposed indications from the IEEE 1394
digital interface.
CHARA
V-POS
020*1
SYS FORMAT
0000
0
:
23
:
0000
1080i
:
The 1080i format is selected.
0023
:
0032
<Note>
0001
720p
The 720p format is selected.
32
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When this menu item has been set, the displays
are output to the HD SDI MONITOR, SD SDI
MONITOR and VIDEO OUT3 connectors in the
DISPLAY SEL status even when the SUPER OFF
setting is established. However, if the menu has
been exited, the SUPER OFF or ON setting is
followed.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
Furthermore, CHARA TYPE is output as per the
menu setting.
009
For setting the display type for the
superimposed displays and for the HD SDI
MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO OUT3
connectors and superimposed indications from
the IEEE 1394 digital interface as well as for the
SETUP MENU, etc.
CHARA TYPE
0000
WHITE
White characters on a black background.
0001
W/OUT
White characters with black borders.
<Note>
CHARA TYPE is output as per the menu setting.
010*1
For setting whether to forcibly set the recorder
to the EE mode and output the player’s
playback signals to the monitor if the PLAYER
button on the recorder is pressed when the
monitor is connected only to the recorder
during deck-to-deck editing.
MONI
CONTROL
0000
MANU
The recorder is not forcibly set to the EE mode.
0001
AUTO
The recorder is forcibly set to the EE mode, and the
player’s playback signals are output.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<BASIC> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
Video output reference
031*2
022
For selecting the format in which the tape is to
be played back.
0000
AUTO
PB FORMAT
OUT REF
0000
MANU
When the HD REF input signal is supplied, it is
used as the reference. If it is not supplied but the
SD REF input signal is supplied, the SD REF
signal serves as the reference instead.
If neither the HD REF nor SD REF input signal is
supplied, the HD serial signal serves as the
reference.
If none of the HD REF, SD REF and HD serial
signals are supplied, the internal sync signal
serves as the reference.
The format is determined by the setting selected
for setup menu item No.023 (FORMAT SEL).
0001
AUTO1
The unit follows the format recorded on the tape.
Whenever the format is changed during
playback, the playback format switches to others
according to the changed format.
0001
AUTO2
If the playback format does not change for 1
second or more after the SERVO lamp lights
when starting playback, the current playback
format is fixed. The fixed playback format is
retained as is even if the format recorded on the
tape is changed unless the playback mode is
released.
For selecting the format when “MANUAL” has
been selected as the setup menu item No.022
(PB FORMAT) setting.
If “AUTO” is selected as the setting, the format
when playback starts is selected, and when the
tape is played back, the format is automatically
detected and matched with the format of the
playback tape.
0001
INPUT
When the serial input signal is supplied, it is used
as the reference.
0002 HD_REF
The signal which is input to the HD REF IN
connector is used as the reference.
0003 SD_REF
The signal which is input to the SD REF IN
connector is used as the reference.
0004 E-AUTO
In edit mode, the state is the same as set in
[INPUT]. In modes other than edit mode, the
state is the same as set in [AUTO].
023
FORMAT
SEL
<Note>
0000
HD-LP
The DVCPRO HD-LP format is selected, and the
setup menu item No.020 (SYS FORMAT) setting
is followed.
*1: When the 50 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz (HD,
SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
*2: When the 23/24 Hz mode is selected in System Menu No. 25
(SYSTEM FREQ), this item is not displayed.
0001
HD-SP
The DVCPRO HD format is selected, and the
setup menu item No.020 (SYS FORMAT) setting
is followed.
0002
422
The DVCPRO50 (422) format is selected.
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
0003
411
The DVCPRO (411) format is selected.
0005
DV
The DV format is selected.
0006 DVCAM
The DVCAM format is selected.
030*1
For setting the field system frequency
0000
59/23
HD
The 59.94/23.98 Hz frequency is set.
0001
FREQUENCY
60/24
The 60/24 Hz frequency is set.
<Notes>
z The set field frequency is enabled only when
there is no input for the OUT REF settings. If
there are any corresponding inputs, the field
frequency coincides with the field frequency of
the input.
z When the HD SDI output is output with 60 Hz/24
Hz, the SD SDI is output as NO SYNC, and the
analog composite is output in the White/Black
mode (burst off).
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<BASIC> (continued)
Formats in which the tape is played back
022:
PB
020:
SYS
023:
FORMAT
Playback format
FORMAT FORMAT SEL
MANUAL 1080i HD_LP
DVCPRO HD-LP(1080i)
DVCPRO HD(1080i)
DVCPRO50(422)
DVCPRO(411)
DV
HD_SP
50M
25M
DV
DVCAM
HD_LP
HD_SP
50M
25M
DV
DVCAM
720p
DVCPRO HD-LP(720p)
DVCPRO HD(720p)
DVCPRO50(422)
DVCPRO(411)
DV
DVCAM
--------
DVCAM
AUTO
--------
DVCPRO HD-LP(1080i)/
DVCPRO HD(1080i)/
DVCPRO HD-LP(720p)/
DVCPRO HD(720p)/
DVCPRO50(422)/
DVCPRO(411)/
DV/DVCAM, automatic
detection
<Notes>
z In the EJECT mode, the format selected by the setup
menu item No.020 (SYS FORMAT) setting applies.
z If “AUTO” has been selected as the setup menu item
No.022 (PB FORMAT) setting, the setup menu item
No.023 (FORMAT SEL) setting is used as the format when
the format is not detected (when the tape has just been
inserted).
However, when “DV” or “DVCAM” has been selected, the
VTR operation will be as if “HD-LP” has been selected.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<OPERATION>
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
100
For selecting the direct search dial operation.
106
For selecting the video and audio output
statuses in the EJECT mode.
0000
DIAL
SEARCH ENA
EJECT EE SEL
0000
EE
Direct search dial operations are performed.
0001
KEY
The EE mode is always established regardless of
the setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) setting.
0001 BLACK
Unless the search button is pressed, the mode
does not change to the search mode.
When setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) is set
to:
101
For selecting the maximum speed of shuttle
operations.
“EE”:
The EE mode is established.
SHTL MAX
“TAPE”: The BLACK mode is established for the
video signals, and the audio signals are
muted.
0000
x9.8
k9.8 times normal speed
0001
x16
0002
GRAY
k16 times normal speed
When setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) is set
to:
0002
x32
k32 times normal speed
<Note>
“EE”:
The EE mode is established.
“TAPE”: The GRAY mode is established for the
video signals, and the audio signals are
muted.
Depending on the tape format, the actual tape
running speed differs slightly from what is indicated
by the superimposed display.
For setting the maximum speed of fast forward
and rewind operations.
<Note>
102
If [EE] is selected when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD,
SD), 50 Hz (HD, SD) mode is selected in System
Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), images are output
in BLACK and voices are muted.
For selecting what signals are to be output
when the EE mode is established.
FF. REW MAX
0000
x16
k16 times normal speed
0001
x32
107*1
k32 times normal speed
0002
x50
EE MODE SEL
0000 NORMAL
k50 times normal speed
Signals delayed by an amount equivalent to the
time taken for the signals to be processed inter-
nally are output.
0003
x60
k60 times normal speed
0004
k100 times normal speed
<Note>
The maximum speed is automatically limited to
50k for the DVCPRO HD and DVCPRO50 format
and to 32k for the DV and DVCAM formats.
For selecting whether a warning is to be
displayed when the REF VIDEO signal has not
been connected.
x100
0001
THRU
The signals are not processed internally but out-
put in their original form with no delay.
<Note>
When 1394 or INT-SG is selected in the video
input, the system operates as “NORMAL”
regardless of the settings in this item.
For setting the play startup time in 1-frame
increments.
104
108
REF ALARM
PLAY DELAY
0000
OFF
0000
:
0015
0
:
15
A warning is not displayed.
0001
ON
A warning is displayed by the blinking STOP
lamp.
For selecting the VTR mode which is to be set
to the EE mode when “0 (EE)” is selected as the
setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) setting.
109*1
For selecting the field unit for locking the
playback framing.
105*1
CAP. LOCK
<59/60Hz>
0000
0001
<50Hz>
0000
0001
AUTO EE SEL
2F
4F
2F
4F
8F
0000
S/F/R
The EE mode is established when the VTR is in
the STOP, FF or REW mode.
0001
The EE mode is established when the VTR is in
the STOP mode only.
0002
110
For selecting whether the tape is to be
automatically wound back to its beginning
when the tape-end has been detected.
STOP
AUTO REW
0000
OFF
*1: When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
The tape stops when it reaches the tape-end.
0001
The tape is rewound to its beginning.
ON
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<OPERATION> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
111*1
113*1
For selecting whether to automatically stop the
VTR when the counter value is at the “0”
position during CTL mode FF and REW
operations.
For selecting whether to allow or inhibit
recording on the cassette tape.
0000
OFF
MEMORY
STOP
REC INH
Recording on the cassette tape is enabled when
the cassette’s accidental erasure prevention
mechanism has been set to the recording enable
position.
0000
OFF
The VTR does not stop.
0001
ON
The VTR is automatically stopped.
0001
ALL
<Notes>
All recording on the cassette tape is inhibited.
z Either the stop or still picture (SHTL STILL or
SLOW STILL) mode, whichever has been set
using setup menu item No.307 (AFTER CUE-
UP), is established when the VTR is stopped.
z If both the AUTO REW function and MEMORY
function have been selected at the same time,
the AUTO REW operation takes priority.
0002
PRE
Overwriting is inhibited during normal recording.
This is the setting to activate the accidental
erasure prevention function. While CTL is
detected, the recording is inhibited, and when
CTL cannot be detected, it is executed.
0003
NORM
Normal recording is inhibited.
Use this setting when it is preferable to avoid
using normal recording in all applications except
for editing.
112
For selecting what playback images are to be
output in the STANDBY OFF (HALF LOADING)
mode and EJECT mode.
FRZ MODE
SEL
0000
DIS
0004
V/CTL
The video output is muted.
0001 STB OFF
The recording of the video and CTL signals is
inhibited.
Use this setting when it is preferable to avoid
editing in all applications except for audio editing.
<Note>
When the PRE, NORM or V/CTL setting has been
selected, the REC INHIBIT lamp blinks (on for
approx. 0.5 sec. and then off for approx. 0.5 sec.).
For selecting whether the REC INHIBIT lamp is to
blink or light when the cassette tape has been set
to the accidental erasure protection mode.
Only when the STANDBY OFF mode is estab-
lished is the image which was being played back
at that moment frozen and output.
0002 SOF&EJ
When either the STANDBY OFF mode or the
EJECT mode is established, the image which
was being played back at that moment is frozen
and output.
114
<Notes>
z The status when the picture is frozen is
determined by the setup menu item No.604
(FREEZE SEL) setting.
z In the EJECT mode, the frozen picture is output
only when 1 (BLACK) or 2 (GRAY) has been
selected as the setup menu item No.106 (EJECT
EE SEL) setting.
z When the 720/24p over 60p source is used and
the 23/24 mode is selected in System Menu item
No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), playback cannot be
frozen in EJECT mode.
REC INH
LAMP
0000
LIGHT
The lamp lights.
0001
FLASH
The lamp blinks.
<Note>
When Setup Menu No. 113 (REC INH) is set to
[ALL], the REC INHIBIT LAMP always lights
regardless of the setting.
For selecting whether to enable or disable the
operation of the EJECT button on the VTR’s
front panel.
115*1
EJECT SW
INH
0000
REC
Description of MEMORY STOP function
Operation is disabled while the VTR is in the
recording mode.
The MEMORY STOP function does
not work if this margin is less than 0
0001
OFF
Operation is enabled in all modes.
d
2 frames.
0 point
REW button
116
For selecting whether the EJECT lamp is to
remain lighted or go off after the cassette tape
has been ejected.
FF button
3
1
EJECT LAMP
0000 MODE1
The EJECT lamp remains lighted.
0001 MODE2
The EJECT lamp goes off.
FF button
REW
button
4
2
Accidental erasure protection function
!
@
#
$
If the FF button is pressed, the normal FF operation is
performed since there is no 0 point in the direction of this
operation.
If the REW button is pressed, the PREROLL lamp lights (as
does the SHTL lamp), the VTR prerolls the tape, and it
automatically stops when the counter value is at the 0 position.
If the REW button is pressed, the normal REW operation is
performed since there is no 0 point in the direction of this
operation.
This function is used to prevent parts already recorded on a tape
from being recorded over. Accidental erasure of pre-recorded
tapes is prevented by positioning the CTL signal rec/play heads as
shown in the figure below so that whether a recording has been
made can be determined by the presence or absence of the CTL
signal. When the REC/PLAY button is pressed with a pre-
recorded tape, the tape runs but the REC button lamp blinks, the
beeping alarm is sounded, and no signals are recorded.
If the FF button is pressed, the PREROLL lamp lights (as does
the SHTL lamp), the VTR prerolls the tape, and it
automatically stops when the counter value is at the 0 position.
A/C heads
(rec/play heads)
PRE CTL
head
*1: When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
Rough sketch showing CTL head positions
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<OPERATION> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
118*1
140*1
For selecting whether to allow or inhibit
recording on a tape which has been written by a
format other than DVCPRO HD-LP.
For selecting the output signals.
0000
EE
The input signals selected by setup menu items
No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL) and No.713 (CH1 IN
SEL) to No.724 (D IN SEL 78) are output.
SP MODE
INH
OUTPUT
0000
OFF
Recording on the cassette tape is allowed.
0001
ON
0001
TAPE
Recording on the cassette tape is inhibited.
<In the STOP mode>
<Note>
The signals played back from the tape are output.
<During recording or editing>:
The simultaneous playback signals are output.
<Note>
When [OFF] is selected, the inhibition/permission
state for recording to a cassette tape follows Setup
Menu No. 113 (REC INH).
Output signals when recording and editing are
selected in Setup Menu No. 119 (CONFI REC)
and No. 302 (CONFI EDIT).
For setting what is to be controlled by the audio
volume controls on the front panel.
119*1
For selecting whether or not to perform simul-
taneous playback during normal recording.
0000
OFF
CONFI REC
141*1
According to the settings in Setup Menu No. 140
(OUTPUT), the simultaneous playback operation
during normal recording shifts.
0000
REC
VOLUME
The controls function as REC volume controls.
EE
：EE output
0001
PB
TAPE ：Simultaneous playback output
0001
ON
The controls function as PB volume controls.
Regardless of the settings in Setup Menu No.
140 (OUTPUT), simultaneous playback is always
applied during normal recording.
For selecting what cue point operation is to be
performed when the multi cue function has
been set to ON.
0002
AUTO
Normally, the controls function as PB volume
controls. However, during recording or in the EE/
INPUT CHECK status, they automatically func-
tion as REC volume controls.
For selecting the conditions under which the
AUDIO UNITY lamp on the front panel is to light.
131
142*1
PAGE MODE
0000
MANU
Operation is confined within the selected page,
and 6 cue points can be registered.
0000
IN
AUDIO UNITY
The lamp lights when all the audio input levels
0001
AUTO
are set to the UNITY level.
When the page whose cue points are being reg-
istered becomes full, operation is automatically
transferred to the next page, and registration is
continued. A total of 60 cue points on up to 10
pages can be registered.
For selecting whether to perform the
registration operation if all the cue points have
already been registered when the multi cue
function has been set to ON.
0001
OUT
The lamp lights when all the audio output levels
are set to the UNITY level.
002
The lamp lights when all the audio input and out-
put levels are set to the UNITY level.
For setting whether the lighting of the tape
mechanism is to be set to ON or remain OFF.
IN/OUT
132
143
ROTA MODE
0000
OFF
CASSTT
LIGHT
0000
OFF
The mechanism does not light even when a cas-
sette is inserted.
0001
No further cue points are registered.
0001
ON
ON
The registration operation is continued. If “MANU”
has been selected as the setup menu item No.131
(PAGE MODE) setting, the next cue point is
The mechanism lights when a cassette is
inserted.
For switching the preset registration method for
the time code.
0000 NORMAL
The time code is input starting with the left-most
digit.
144
registered at CUE
“AUTO” has been selected, it is registered at CUE01.
¢1 on the page concerned; if
TC INPUT
133
For setting the volume of the sound heard when
the keys are touched.
0000
0001
0002
OFF
LOW
HIGH
KEY BEEP
0001
REV
The time code is input from the high-order digit
but is displayed from the right-most digit.
134
For setting the volume of the alarm tone.
145
For selecting whether the LCD monitor display
on the front panel is to be turned on or off.
0000
0001
0002
OFF
LOW
HIGH
ALARM BEEP
0000
OFF
FRONT LCD
The display is turned off.
<Note>
0001
ON
If the fan motor has shut down, the alarm tone is
sounded at the HIGH volume level regardless of
this setting.
The display is turned on or off in synchronization
with the screen saver operation for the time code
display area.
146
If the front operation or tape operation is not
executed for some while, the time code display
switches to the screen saver display.
For selecting the screen saver display format.
0000 BLACK
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
SAVER DISP
To the black display
0001
LOGO
To display [EX] logo animation
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<INTERFACE>
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
200
For selecting whether to operate two or more
VTRs in synchronization.
209
For setting whether or not to return the ACK
code when a command is received from RS-
232C.
0000
DIS
PARA RUN
RETURN ACK
The VTRs are not operated in synchronization.
0001
ENA
0000
OFF
The VTRs are operated in synchronization.
The ACK code is not returned
<Note>
0001
ON
To operate the VTRs in synchronization, set all the
For setting what ID information is to be
returned to the controller.
0000 OTHER
The ACK code is returned.
212
For selecting the remote control connector for
controlling the slave machine when this VTR is
to be used as the master machine for deck-to-
deck operations.
202
MASTER
PORT
ID SEL
For setting the ID information of a VTR other
than DVCPRO
0000 IN/OUT
0001 DVCPRO
The IN/OUT connector is used.
For setting the ID information of the DVCPRO
0001
OUT
0002
ORIG
The OUT connector is used.
<Note>
This setting takes effect only when the 9P button
has been set to LOCAL (LED off).
Set only for connecting with the Panasonic
controller (AG-A850, optional).
For selecting whether the RS-232C connector is
to function.
204
0000
OFF
RS2323C SEL
The RS-232C connector does not function.
0001
ON
The RS-232C connector functions.
205
For setting the RS-232C data transfer speed
(baud rate).
BAUD RATE
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
206
For setting the RS-232C data length.
(Unit: bits)
DATA
LENGTH
0000
0001
7
8
207
For setting the number of RS-232C stop bits.
(Unit: bits)
STOP BIT
0000
0001
1
2
208
For setting whether the RS-232C parity bit is to
be used and, if it is used, whether even or odd
parity is to apply.
PARITY
0000
NON
The parity bit is not used.
0001
ODD
The parity bit is used with an odd parity.
0002
EVEN
The parity bit is used with an even parity.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<EDIT>
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
300
For selecting the operation to be performed
when an edit point has been set incorrectly
(when the OUT point comes before the IN
point).
308
For setting the maximum speed of SLOW FWD.
0000
+4.9
IN/OUT DEL
VAR FWD MAX
i4.9 times normal tape speed
0001
+2
0000
MANU
i2 times normal tape speed (i1.85 times
normal tape speed for formats other than
DVCPRO HD-LP)
Editing is not performed unless the illegal edit
point is cleared or set properly.
0001
AUTO
0002
+1
The edit point which had already been input is
cleared automatically.
i1 times normal tape speed
<Notes>
z At any setting other than 0 (i4.9), phase
adjustments cannot be conducted from the
editing controller.
z Depending on the format used, the actual tape
running speed differs slightly from what is
indicated by the superimposed display.
301
For selecting whether to show a negative
display (time code display area) when the IN
point is greater than the OUT point.
NEGA FLASH
0000
OFF
A negative display is not shown.
309
For setting the maximum speed of SLOW REV.
0001
ON
A negative display is shown.
For selecting whether to perform simultaneous
playback during editing.
0000
-4.9
VAR REV MAX
302*1
j4.9 times normal tape speed
0001
-2
CONFI EDIT
j2 times normal tape speed (j1.85 times
normal tape speed for formats other than
DVCPRO HD-LP)
0000
OFF
Simultaneous playback is not performed.
0001
Simultaneous playback is performed.
<Note>
Regardless of the settings in Setup Menu No. 140
(OUTPUT), simultaneous playback is always
performed during editing.
For selecting how to connect the digital audio
edit IN points.
ON
0002
-1
j1 times normal tape speed
<Note>
Depending on the format used, the actual tape
running speed differs slightly from what is indicated
by the superimposed display.
303*1
310
For setting the maximum speed of JOG FWD.
AUD EDIT
IN
0000
+4.9
JOG FWD
MAX
0000
Cut processing
0001
V-fade processing
For selecting how to connect the digital audio
edit OUT points.
CUT
i4.9 times normal tape speed
0001
+2
FADE
i2 times normal tape speed (i1.85 times
normal tape speed for formats other than
DVCPRO HD-LP)
304*1
0002
+1
AUD EDIT OUT
i1 times normal tape speed
<Note>
At any setting other than 0 (i4.9), phase
adjustments cannot be conducted from the editing
controller which performs these adjustments by the
JOG command.
0000
Cut processing
0001
CUT
FADE
V-fade processing
305
For selecting whether to register the IN points
using the PREROLL button in cases where the
IN points have not been registered.
311
For setting the maximum speed of JOG REV.
AUTO ENTRY
0000
-4.9
JOG REV MAX
0000
DIS
j4.9 times normal tape speed
0001
The IN points are not registered.
0001
The IN points are registered
-2
ENA
j2 times normal tape speed (j1.85 times
normal tape speed for formats other than
DVCPRO HD-LP)
306*1
For selecting the deck whose the color framing
is to be adjusted during deck-to-deck editing.
0000 PLAYER
The player’s IN and OUT points are adjusted
(using the recorder as the reference).
0001 RECORD
The recorder’s IN and OUT points are adjusted
(using the player as the reference).
For selecting the VTR’s mode upon completion
of the cue-up operation.
0002
-1
CF ADJ SEL
j1 times normal tape speed
312*1
For setting the postroll time.
Any time from 0 to 5 seconds can be set in 1-
second increments.
POSTROLL
TM
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0s
1s
2s
3s
4s
5s
307
AFTER
CUE-UP
0000
STOP
The VTR is set to the STOP mode.
0001
STILL
The VTR is set to the still picture (SHTL STILL)
mode.
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
0002
STILL2
The VTR is set to the still picture (SLOW STILL)
mode.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<EDIT> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
323*1
313
When the search dial from intermediate
position turning to the right or the left with
SLOW mode, the speed in the click point is set.
As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s CH4
edit presets are set to ON or OFF following the
analog audio signals specified by the controller.
CLICK POINT
EDIT RPLCE4
0000
Not set.
0001
N-DEF
CH1
0000
1
i/j1 time speed
0002
1.85
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.
i/j1.85 time speed (i1.85/j1.5 times speed
for format DVCPRO HD-LP)
0002
CH2
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.
320*1
For setting the allocation of the channels for the
analog audio presets of a controller when a
controller without a function to control the edit
presets of the digital audio signals is used to
edit the digital audio signals of the VTR.
The VTR’s CH1 edit presets are set to ON or OFF
following the analog audio signals specified by the
controller.
0003
CH1+2
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are
followed.
As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s CUE
edit presets are set to ON or OFF following the
analog audio signals specified by the editor or
controller.
EDIT RPLCE1
324*1
EDIT RPLCEC
0000
Not set.
0001
N-DEF
CH1
0000
Not set.
0001
N-DEF
CH1
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.
0002
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.
0003
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are
followed.
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.
0002
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.
0003
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are
followed.
CH2
CH2
CH1+2
CH1+2
321*1
As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s CH2
edit presets are set to ON or OFF following the
analog audio signals specified by the controller.
EDIT RPLCE2
0000
Not set.
0001
N-DEF
CH1
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.
0002
CH2
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.
0003
CH1+2
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are
followed.
322*1
As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s CH3
edit presets are set to ON or OFF following the
analog audio signals specified by the controller.
EDIT RPLCE3
0000
Not set.
0001
N-DEF
CH1
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.
0002
CH2
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.
0003
CH1+2
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are
followed.
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<TAPE PROTECT>
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
400
For selecting the duration of the time taken
after the VTR is left standing in the STOP or
search STILL mode (JOG, SLOW or SHTL)
before the tape protection mode is established.
(Units: s = seconds, min = minutes)
403
When the time set in Setup Menu No. 400 (STILL
TIMER) elapses in the STOP state, the unit
automatically returns to the tape protection
mode. This is for selecting the types of tape
protection mode.
STILL TIMER
STOP
PROTECT
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
<Note>
0.5s
5s
0000
STEP FWD
0001
Half-loading
0002
Tension release
<Notes>
STEP
HALF
10s
20s
30s
40s
50s
1min
2min
T-REL
z When STEP FWD is selected, the VTR is
automatically transferred to the standby OFF
(half-loading) mode after it has been left standing
in the STOP mode for a total of 30 minutes (or 1
minute in the case of a DV or DVCAM tape).
z When, after tension release has been selected
and the VTR has been transferred to the tension
release mode, the VTR has been left standing in
this mode for a total of 2 hours, it is automatically
transferred to the standby OFF (half-loading)
mode. However, in the case of a DV or DVCAM
tape, the transfer to the tension release mode is
inhibited, and the VTR operates as if STEP FWD
has been selected.
z For an unused tape (except for a DV/DVCAM
tape), the mode forcibly moves to the tension
release mode 0.5 seconds after the STILL state.
z For the DVCPRO HD-SP, DVCPRO50, or
DVCPRO tapes, the mode forcibly moves to the
tension release mode 0.5 seconds after the
STILL state during the EE mode.
When a DV or DVCAM tape is used, the time is set
to 10 seconds even when a setting of 2 (10s) or
longer is selected.
When the time set in Setup Menu No. 400 (STILL
TIMER) elapses in the Search Still (JOG/SLOW/
SHTL) state, the unit automatically returns to
the tape protection mode. This is for selecting
the types of tape protection mode.
401
SRC
PROTECT
0000
STEP FWD
0001
Half-loading
0002
Tension release
<Notes>
z When STEP FWD is selected, the VTR is
automatically transferred to the standby OFF
(half-loading) mode after it has been left standing
in the STILL status for a total of 30 minutes (or 1
minute in the case of a DV or DVCAM tape).
z When, after tension release has been selected
and the VTR has been transferred to the tension
release mode, the VTR has been left standing in
this mode for a total of 2 hours, it is automatically
transferred to the standby OFF (half-loading)
mode. However, in the case of a DV or DVCAM
tape, the transfer to the tension release mode is
inhibited, and the VTR operates as if STEP FWD
has been selected.
STEP
HALF
T-REL
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
z For an unused tape (except for a DV/DVCAM
tape), the mode forcibly moves to the tension
release mode 0.5 seconds after the STILL state.
402
For selecting whether the drum is to operate in
the standby OFF (half-loading) mode.
DRUM STDBY
0000
OFF
The drum stops rotating.
0001
ON
The drum continues to rotate.
<Precaution for STILL TIMER item setting>
The cumulative total standby time passed in the same
location increases at such times when the same material is
repeatedly used as is the case when programs are
transmitted, for example.
To protect the tape, it is recommended to set the standby
time at the same position as short as possible.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<TIME CODE>
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
500*2
505*1
For selecting whether or not to output the VITC
signal at the positions selected by setup menu
items No.501 (VITC POS-1) and No.502 (VITC
POS-2).
For selecting the regeneration signal when
REGEN has been selected as the TCG (time
code generator) mode.
VITC BLANK
TCG REGEN
0000 TC&UB
0000 BLANK
The VITC signal is not output.
Regeneration applies to both the time code and
user bits.
0001
TC
0001
THRU
Regeneration applies only to the time code only.
The VITC signal is output.
<Note>
0002
UB
Only the SD output takes effect at this setting.
Regeneration applies only to the user bits only
501*2
506*1
For setting the position where the VITC signal
is to be inserted.
For selecting the editing mode range when the
VTR is operating in the REGEN mode while
performing editing operations with “AUTO”
selected as the setup menu item No.503 (TCG
MODE) setting.
VITC POS-1
REGEN MODE
<59/60Hz>
<50Hz>, <25Hz(SD)>, <50Hz(SD)>
0000
:
10L
:
0000
:
7L
:
0000
AS&IN
0006
:
16L
:
0004
:
11L
:
Regeneration applies during assemble or insert
editing.
0001 ASSEM
Regeneration applies during assemble editing.
0010
20L
0015
22L
<Notes>
z The same line as the one selected by the setup
menu item No.502 (VITC POS-2) or
No.692(UMID POS) cannot be selected.
z Only the SD output takes effect at this setting.
For setting the position where the VITC signal
is to be inserted.
0002
INSRT
Regeneration applies during insert editing
507*1
For selecting the time code to be used when
HDSDI or SDSDI has been selected as the setup
menu item No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL) setting when
an external time code is to be used.
502*2
TC SOURCE
VITC POS-2
<59/60Hz>
<50Hz>, <25Hz(SD)>, <50Hz(SD)>
[When HDSDI has been selected]
0000
:
10L
:
0000
:
7L
:
0000
INT
The time code of the internal time code genera-
tor is used.
0008
:
18L
:
0006
:
13L
:
0001
EXT_L
0010
20L
0015
22L
LTC of the TIME CODE IN connector is used.
<Notes>
0002
SLTC
z The same line as the one selected by the setup
menu item No.501 (VITC POS-1) or
The LTC information added to the serial signals
which are input to HD SDI IN is used.
No.692(UMID POS) cannot be selected.
z Only the SD output takes effect at this setting.
For setting the synchronization of the internal
time code generator.
0003
SVITC
The VITC information added to the serial signals
which are input to HD SDI IN is used.
503*1
[When SDSDI has been selected]
TCG MODE
0000
INT
0000 REGEN
The time code of the internal time code genera-
tor is used.
The time code reader is synchronized with the
time code which is read from the tape.
0001
EXT_L
0001
PRE
LTC of the TIME CODE IN connector is used.
Presetting is enabled at the operation panel or by
the remote controller.
0002
VITC
0002
AUTO
The VITC information added to the serial signals
which are input to SD SDI IN is used.
<Notes>
z If the VIDEO IN SEL input selection is changed,
the time code is converted as shown below.
The REGEN and PRE settings are automatically
switched in accordance with the operation mode.
In the editing mode: REGEN is selected.
In all other modes: PRE is selected.
[HDSDI] <>
[SDSDI]
INT
EXT_L
EXT_L
VITC
504*1
For setting when the internal time code
generator is to advance depending on the
operation mode.
INT
<>
<>
<>
<>
EXT_L
SLTC
SVITC
RUN MODE
0000
REC
The time code generator is advanced during
recording.
z When [1394] is selected in Setup Menu No. 600
(VIDEO IN SEL), the time code input for the
IEEE 1394 digital input/output connector is used.
However, the VITC information is not
0001
FREE
The time code generator is advanced while the
superimposed on the video signal during EE
mode and when recording. Furthermore, LTC
information and VITC information are not
superimposed on the HD serial output.
power is on regardless of which operation mode
is established.
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD) mode, or 50 Hz (HD)
mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ),
this item is not displayed.
*1
*2
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<TIME CODE> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
508*1
For setting how the user bits of the time code
generated by the TCG is to be used.
513
For selecting how to output the VITC which is
superimposed on the output video signal.
VITC OUT
0000
000
0000
SBC
BINARY GP
NOT SPECIFIED (no character set specified)
In the playback mode, the time code recorded in
the SBC area is output.
0001
001
0001
VAUX
ISO CHARACTER (8-bit character set complying
with ISO646, ISO2022 standards)
In the playback mode, the time code recorded in
the VAUX area is output.
0002
010
<Note>
UNASSIGNED 1(undefined)
z The VITC information detected by the HD serial
input is automatically recorded in the VAUX area
when the video signals are recorded.
0003
011
UNASSIGNED 2(undefined)
0004
100
z When [23/24], [25 (HD)], [25 (SD)], [50 (HD)], or
[50 (SD)] is selected in System Menu No. 25
(SYSTEM FREQ) and [VAUX] is selected, the
output time codes may not be consecutive.
UNASSIGNED 3(undefined)
0005
101
PAGE/LINE
0006
110
514
For selecting whether to superimpose the VITC
information on the HD serial output.
UNASSIGNED 4(undefined)
0007
111
HD EMBD
VITC
UNASSIGNED 5(undefined)
0000
OFF
509
For selecting whether to exercise phase
correction control over the LTC which is
generated by the TCG.
The VITC information is not superimposed.
0001
The VITC information is superimposed.
ON
PHASE CORR
515
For selecting whether to superimpose the LTC
information on the HD serial output.
0000
OFF
Phase correction control is not exercised.
HD EMBD LTC
0001
ON
：
0000
OFF
Phase correction control is exercised.
The LTC information is not superimposed.
510*1
0001
ON
For selecting whether to set the CF flag of the
TCG to ON or OFF.
The LTC information ist superimposed.
516*1
For selecting the processing to align the phase
of the time code which is output from the TIME
CODE OUT connector.
Normally, the time code which is output from the
TIME CODE OUT connector is aligned with the
output video and audio. If so required by the
connection with an external component or for some
other reason, this item makes it possible to set the
mode for aligning the phase with the input.
0000
OFF
TCG CF FLAG
The CF flag is set to OFF.
0001
The CF flag is set to ON
For selecting the drop frame or non-drop frame
mode for CTL and TCG.
ON
TC OUT ADV
511*2
DF MODE
0000
DF
The drop frame mode is selected.
0001
NDF
0000
OFF
The non-drop frame mode is selected.
The phase alignment processing is not con-
ducted. The time code which is output from the
TIME CODE OUT connector is aligned with the
output video and audio.
<Note>
This DF mode setting takes effect only when
LOCAL is selected or when “ENA” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.001 (LOCAL
ENA) setting.
For switching the phase of the time code, which
is output from the TIME CODE OUT connector,
in response to the external LTC input when a
setting other than “INT” has been selected for
setup menu item No.507 (TC SOURCE). (In EE
mode only)
0001
EDIT
During playback when an editing mode has been
selected and during editing, the time code which
is output from the TIME CODE OUT connector is
aligned with the input video and audio. In all
other modes, it is aligned with the output video
and audio.
512*1
TC OUT REF
517*1
For selecting whether to latch the TCG display
and LTC output during INPUT CHECK.
0000
VOUT
The phase is aligned with the output image.
0001
The phase is aligned with the external time code
input.
TCG OUT
0000 MOMENT
The INPUT CHECK mode is established only
while the INPUT CHECK key is held down.
TC IN
0001
LATCH
SBC (sub code data) area:
When the INPUT CHECK key is pressed, the
INPUT CHECK mode is established; even when
it is released, the mode remains unchanged.
The selection is released when the video output
is set to a mode other than the EE mode.
This is an area on the helical track, and it is separate from the video
and audio data area. The time codes, recording dates and times
and other tape control information complying with SMPTE/EBU
standards are stored here. As with the conventional LTC (linear
time code), the time code can be read even during rewinding or fast
forwarding. It can also be read out when the tape has stopped.
VAUX (video auxiliary data) area:
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
This area is to be found in the video data area on the helical track.
The additional information relating to the video data is stored here.
*1
*2
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, 50 Hz (HD,
SD) mode or 50 Hz mode is selected in System Menu No. 25
(SYSTEM FREQ), this item is not displayed.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<VIDEO>
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
600*1
605*1
For selecting the video signal which is to be
input.
During field slow playback, vertical
interpolation is conducted automatically to
minimize the up/down movement of the
playback pictures. However, this setting
enables the interpolation operation to be
forcibly set to OFF.
VIDEO IN SEL
INTERPOLATE
0000
INT SG
The internal signal selected by the VIDEO INT
SG item is generated.
0001
HDSDI
0000
OFF
The serial video signal which has been input to
the HD SDI IN connector is selected.
0003
For selecting the compressed digital signals
input to the DV connector (digital video
interface). In this case, the audio input signals
are also signals from the DV connector.
The interpolation is forcibly set to OFF
0001
During slow playback, the interpolation is auto-
matically set to ON
For switching the MONITOR output signal from
SD SDI connector.
AUTO
1394
606
SD MONI O
SEL
0000
MONI
0004
SD SDI
The MONITOR signal is output.
0001
The same video signal as the one output from
the SD SDI OUT1 connector is output.
For selecting the serial image signals input to the
SD SDI IN connector
For selecting the type of internal signal.
SDI
601*1
<Note>
0000 100%CB
A 100% color bar signal is selected.
0001 75%CB
A 75% color bar signal is selected.
0002 SMPTE
An SMPTE color bar signal is selected.
VIDEO INT SG
When 1 (SDI) is selected, the time code and other
information are not superimposed on the display.
This is used to select the method to process the
images using the vertical filter during down-
conversion.
619*4
V_FILTER
0000
FIELD
0003
ARIB
The images are processed by field basis.
0001 FRAME
The images are processed by frame basis.
<Note>
When “FRAME” has been selected, the resolution
is improved, but the images may flicker.
For selecting the picture frame during down-
conversion.
An ARIB color bar signal is selected.
0004
MB
A multiburst signal is selected.
0005
RAMP
A ramp signal is selected.
0006 BLACK
A black signal is selected.
620*2
0007
PLL
DOWNCON
MODE
0000
Side cut mode
0001
FIT-V
A PLL signal is selected.
0008
EQ
FIT-H
An EQ signal is selected.
For selecting how to process the serial input.
Letter box mode
602*1
0002
FIT-HV
Squeeze mode
0000 DR OFF
The 8 higher bits after rounding up the 2 lowest
bits are recorded.
SDI IN MODE
0003
14:9
Semi letter box 14:9
0004
13:9
0001
DR ON
Semi letter box 13:9
For selecting the picture frame during up-
conversion.
The signal with 8 higher bits, obtained by
dynamic rounding, is recorded.
For selecting whether the image input signal is
muted or not when blank parts of the tape are
detected during playback
621*3
603
UPCON MODE 0000
FIT-V
Side panel mode
V-MUTE SEL
0001
FIT-H
Top and bottom cut in vertical direction
0000 N MUTE
0002
FIT-HV
The signals are not muted.
(They are frozen.)
Stretch mode
622
For selecting the horizontal frequency band
during down-conversion and line conversion
(1080i <> 720p).
0001
GRAY
The signals are muted with gray.
0002 BLACK
The signals are muted with black.
D/C RESP
H
0000
0001
WIDE
STD
0003
NOISE
The signals are muted with noise.
For selecting the freeze mode of the still
pictures and slow playback mode.
*1
*2
*3
*4
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD) mode, or 50 Hz (HD)
mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ),
this item is not displayed.
When the 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode or 50 Hz (HD, SD) mode is
selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), this item is
not displayed.
This item is displayed only when the 25 Hz (SD) mode is
selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ)
604*1
FREEZE SEL
0000
FIELD
Field freeze, field slow
0001 FRAME
Frame freeze, frame slow
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<VIDEO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
630*1
623
For selecting the vertical frequency band
during down-conversion and line conversion
(1080i <> 720p).
For selecting the HD output signal format
during 1080i tape playback or in the 1080i EE
mode.
D/C RESP
V
1080i
OUT
> HD_
0000
1080i
720p
0000
0001
WIDE
STD
0001
<Note>
624*2
For selecting the horizontal frequency band
during up-conversion and line conversion.
When [SD SDI] is selected in Setup Menu No. 600
(VIDEO IN SEL), images are output in the format
selected in Setup Menu No. 020 (SYS FORMAT)
regardless of the settings in this menu.
For selecting the HD output signal format
during 720p tape playback or in the 720p EE
mode.
U/C RESP
H
0000
0001 NARROW
For selecting the vertical frequency band
during up-conversion and line conversion.
STD
632*3
625*2
720p
OUT
> HD_
U/C RESP
V
0000
0001 NARROW
For accentuating the horizontal contours
during down-conversion and line conversion
(1080i <> 720p).
STD
0000
0001
1080i
720p
626
<Note>
When [SD SDI] is selected in Setup Menu No. 600
(VIDEO IN SEL), images are output in the format
selected in Setup Menu No. 020 (SYS FORMAT)
regardless of the settings in this menu.
For selecting the HD output signal format while
playing back an SD tape (DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/
DV/DVCAM).
D/C ENH
H
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0dB
+0.7dB
+1dB
+1.2dB
+1.5dB
2dB
636*1
SD
OUT
>
HD_
0000
0001
1080i
720p
<Note>
The numbers on the superimposed display are
approximations only.
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When the 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode or 50 Hz (HD, SD) mode is
selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), this item is
not displayed.
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
627
For accentuating the vertical contours during
down-conversion and line conversion
(1080i <> 720p).
D/C ENH V
*2
*3
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0dB
+0.7dB
+1dB
+1.2dB
+1.5dB
2dB
<Note>
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
The numbers on the superimposed display are
approximations only.
628*2
For accentuating the horizontal contours
during up-conversion.
U/C ENH H
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0dB
+0.7dB
+1dB
+1.2dB
+1.5dB
2dB
<Note>
The numbers on the superimposed display are
approximations only.
629*2
For accentuating the vertical contours during
up-conversion.
U/C ENH V
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0dB
0.7dB
+1dB
1.2dB
+1.5dB
2dB
<Note>
The numbers on the superimposed display are
approximations only.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<VIDEO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
For adjusting the Y level of the HD SDI output.
(j∞ to 0 dB to i3 dB)
638*1
For selecting the up-conversion picture frame
when SD SDI input signals are supplied.
653
IN U/C
MODE
Y LVL (HD)*UP
0000
FIT-V
0000
:
0.0%
:
Side panel mode
0001
FIT-H
1000 100.0%
Top and bottom cut in vertical direction
:
:
0002
FIT-HV
1413 141.3%
<Note>
This setting takes effect when “CMPNT” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
Stretch mode
639*1
For selecting the horizontal frequency band
during the up-conversion of SD SDI input
signals.
I U/C RESP H
654
For adjusting the PB level of the HD SDI output.
0000
0001 NARROW
For selecting the vertical frequency band
during the up-conversion of SD SDI input
signals.
0000
0001 NARROW
For accentuating the horizontal contours
during up-conversion of SD SDI input signals.
STD
(j∞ to 0 dB to i3 dB)
Pb LVL
*
UP
640*1
(HD)
0000
:
0.0%
:
I U/C RESP V
1000 100.0%
STD
:
:
1413 141.3%
<Note>
This setting takes effect when “CMPNT” has been
641*1
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
For adjusting the PB level of the HD SDI output.
(j∞ to 0 dB to i3 dB)
I U/C ENH
H
0000
0001
0002
0003
0dB
+0.7dB
+1dB
0004
0005
+1.5dB
+2dB
655
Pr LVL (HD)
*
UP
+1.2dB
0000
:
0.0%
:
<Note>
The numbers on the superimposed display are
approximations only.
For accentuating the vertical contours during
up-conversion of SD SDI input signals.
1000 100.0%
:
:
642*1
1413 141.3%
<Note>
I U/C ENH
V
This setting takes effect when “CMPNT” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0dB
+0.7dB
+1dB
0004
0005
+1.5dB
+2dB
*1
*2
*3
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, 50 Hz (HD,
SD) mode or 50 Hz mode is selected in System Menu No. 25
(SYSTEM FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When the 50 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz (HD,
SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
+1.2dB
<Note>
The numbers on the superimposed display are
approximations only.
For selecting the input method for line 20 and
line 21 of the video signal while the SD signal is
input
643*2
IN BLK
LINE
0000
Not blank
0001
Blank
OFF
ON
*UP: With HD output (HD tape playback or up-converted output)
*DW: With SD output (SD tape playback or down-converted output)
650
0000 CMPNT*
Level adjustment mode for the component style
0001 CMPST
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
STYLE
Level adjustment mode for the composite style
* The asterisk denotes the factory setting for
AJ-HD1800E.
651*3
For selecting the rotational axis of the chroma
phase adjustment.
HUE STYLE
(SD)*DW
0000
Pb-Pr
The axis rotates in a perfect circle on the SDI
(component style) vectorscope.
0001
U-V
The axis rotates in a perfect circle on the analog
(composite style) vectorscope.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<VIDEO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
656
For adjusting the black level of the HD SDI
output.
663
For adjusting the chroma level of HD SDI, SD
SDI, and analog composite output
(j ∞ to 0 dB to i3 dB)
BK LVL
C LEVEL
*
UP
50
-10.0%
(HD)
:
:
0.0%
:
0000
:
0.0%
:
150
:
1000 100.0%
250
+10.0%
:
:
<Note>
1413 141.3%
<Note>
This setting takes effect when “CMPST” has been
This setting takes effect when “CMPNT” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
658
For adjusting the Y level of SD SDI output and
analog composite output
(j∞ to 0 dB to i3 dB)
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
664
For adjusting the chroma phase of HD SDI, SD
SDI, and analog composite output
(Approx.j 30x to i30x)
*
DW
Y LVL (SD)
HUE
0000
:
0.0%
:
(AJ-HD1800P)
0000
j31.0
:
:
1000 100.0%
C PHASE
(AJ-HD1800E)
0062
:
0.0
:
:
:
1413 141.3%
0124
<Note>
31.0
<Note>
This setting takes effect when “CMPNT” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
For adjusting the PB level of SD SDI output and
analog composite output
z This setting takes effect when “CMPST” has
been selected as the setup menu item No.650
setting.
659
z When the 50 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD/SD) mode, or
50 Hz (HD/SD) mode is selected in System
Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), it is impossible
to adjust the HD SDI output.
z The SD SDI and analog composite output can be
adjusted only when a tape in SD format is played
back, or cross conversion is set in Menu No. 630
(1080i > HD OUT) and No. 631 (720p > HD
OUT).
Pb LVL
(j∞ to 0 dB to i3 dB)
*DW
(SD)
0000
:
0.0%
:
1000 100.0%
:
:
1413 141.3%
<Note>
This setting takes effect when “CMPNT” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
For adjusting the PR level of SD SDI output and
analog composite output
665
For adjusting the setup (black) level of the HD
SDI output, SD SDI output and VIDEO output.
(j10% to i10%)
660
Pr LVL
SETUP LVL
(AJ-HD1800P)
50
-10.0%
(j∞ to 0 dB to i3 dB)
:
:
0.0%
:
*DW
0000
:
0.0%
:
(SD)
150
:
BK LVL
(AJ-HD1800E)
1000 100.0%
250
i10.0%
:
:
<Note>
1413 141.3%
<Note>
This setting takes effect when “CMPNT” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
For adjusting the black level of SD SDI output
and analog composite output
This setting takes effect when “CMPST” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
For adjusting the brightness of the LCD monitor
on the front panel.
670
661
0000
-7
BRIGHTNESS
:
:
BK LVL
(SD)*DW
0007
:
0
:
50
-10.0%
:
:
0.0%
:
0014
7
150
671
For adjusting the color density of the LCD
monitor on the front panel
:
250
+10.0%
0000
-7
COLOR
LEVEL
<Note>
:
:
This setting takes effect when “CMPNT” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
For adjusting the black level of SD SDI output
and analog composite output
(j∞ to 0 dB to i6 dB)
0007
:
0
:
662
0014
7
V LEVEL
*UP: With HD output (HD tape playback or up-converted output)
*DW: With SD output (SD tape playback or down-converted output)
0000
:
0.0%
:
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
1000 100.0%
:
:
2000 200.0%
<Note>
This setting takes effect when “CMPST” has been
selected as the setup menu item No.650 setting.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<VIDEO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
685*1
672
For adjusting the contrast of the LCD monitor
on the front panel.
For selecting the operation mode for edge
subcarrier reduction (ESR) in the playback
circuit.
0000
-7
CONTRAST
ESR MODE
(SD)*DW
:
:
0000
OFF
0007
:
0
:
ESR is forcibly set to OFF
0001
AUTO
0014
7
ESR is automatically set to ON or OFF in
accordance with the VTR operation
For selecting the cross color processing during
playback.
673
For adjusting the backlight
0000 NORMAL
Normal mode
686*1
BACKLIGHT
0001
HIGH
The backlight is brighter than NORMAL.
CCR MODE
(SD)*DW
0000
OFF
676*2
This function clips the signals below the
pedestal level for SD SDI OUT and composite
OUT Y (luminance) signals.
The cross color is output as is.
0001
The cross color can be reduced
For selecting whether to superimpose the
VIDEO INDEX signal on the SD SDI output
signal.
ON
BLK CLIP
0000
OFF
687*3
The signals are not clipped.
0001
ON
The signals are clipped.
For selecting ON or OFF for the closed caption
signals in the first field.
0000 BLANK
The signals are forcibly blanked.
SDI INDEX 0
*DW
680*1
0000
OFF
The VIDEO INDEX signal is not superimposed
on the SD SDI output signal.
0001
The VIDEO INDEX signal is superimposed on
the SD SDI output signal.
For selecting whether to record the closed
caption signals which are superimposed on the
SD input signal.
CC (F1)
BLANK *
DW
ON
0001
THRU
The signals are not blanked
681*1
For selecting ON or OFF for the closed caption
signals in the second field.
0000 BLANK
688*1
CC (F2)
BLANK *
The signals are forcibly blanked.
CC REC
DW
0001
THRU
0000
OFF
The signals are not blanked.
This selects the composite output signal in HD
mode.
The closed caption signals are not recorded on
the tape.
0001
The closed caption signals are recorded on the
tape if they are superimposed on the SD input
signal. In this case, they are blanked, up-
converted and then recorded.
682
ON
0000
THRU
VO SETUP
*
UP
The signal is output with no setup added.
0001 ADD22L
The signal is output from line 22 with a 7.5%
setup added.
(HD)
(This menu is
not displayed
for AJ-
0002 ADD21L
The signal is output from line 21 with a 7.5%
setup added.
0001 ADD20L
The signal is output from line 20 with a 7.5%
setup added.
*1
*2
*3
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When the 50 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz (HD,
SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD) mode, or 50 Hz (HD)
mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ),
this item is not displayed.
HD1800E.)
683
This selects the composite output signal in SD
mode.
0000
THRU
VO SETUP
*
DW
The signal is output with no setup added.
0001 ADD22L
(SD)
*UP: With HD output (HD tape playback or up-converted output)
*DW: With SD output (SD tape playback or down-converted output)
The signal is output from line 22 with a 7.5%
setup added.
0002 ADD21L
The signal is output from line 21 with a 7.5%
setup added.
(This menu is
not displayed
for AJ-
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
HD1800E.)
0001 ADD20L
The signal is output from line 20 with a 7.5%
setup added.
684
For selecting whether EDH is superimposed on
SD SDI output
EDH (SD)*DW
0000
OFF
EDH is not superimposed.
0001
ON
EDH is superimposed
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<VIDEO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
689*1
COMP MODE
This is used to select the method to process the
image compression during recording.
693
GAMMA SEL
This selects gamma correction.
0000
OFF
0000 NORMAL
The images are recorded using the regular
compression processing.
Gamma correction is not carried out.
0001 GAMMA1
This corrects video images shot with the cine
gamma FilmREC mode of the Varicam to images
of film quality (equivalent to Telecine 5 of HD
Gamma Corrector in AJ-GBX27G).
0002 GAMMA2
0001
DARK
The images are recorded while minimizing the
compressed image distortion which arises in the
dark areas below about 10 IRE (70 mV).
<Notes>
This corrects video images shot with the cine
gamma FilmREC mode of the Varicam to images
of film quality (equivalent to Telecine 6 of HD
Gamma Corrector in AJ-GBX27G).
0003 GAMMA3
This converts video images shot with the cine
gamma FilmREC mode of the Varicam into the
Cineon curve appropriate for film recording.
z This setting is valid when recording in the 720p
mode.
z When [DARK] is selected, the indication (c)
blinks to the left of the second line of the super-
imposed indication.
This selects whether or not to record the UMID
information on the tape.
690*1
UMID REC
0000
OFF
1023
UMID information is not recorded on the tape.
The [EE] output is also blank.
0001
ON
768
The UMID set in menu No. 691 UMID GEN is
recorded. If no Basic UMID is available in the
input signals, a Basic UMID of the unit, which is
newly generated, is recorded.
512
256
TELECINE5
TELECINE6
Cineon
<Note>
UMID information cannot be rewritten in this unit.
This selects a UMID that is recorded when
menu No. 690 UMID REC is turned “ON”.
691*1
UMID GEN
0000
INT
256
512
768 1023
Newly created basic UMID information of this
unit is always recorded.
0001
<Notes>
EXT
z Gamma correction is effective in the following
The UMID information of the input signals is
recorded. If no UMID is available in the input
signals, a Basic UMID of the unit, which is newly
generated, is recorded.
conditions.
ŠWhen the VTR operation mode is VV (TAPE)
and 720p is displayed in the system format.
However, when the 23/24 mode is selected in
System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), or 59/
60 and 50i/25p are selected in System Menu
No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), as well as performing
the cross conversion from 720p to 1080i,
gamma correction is not performed for SD
output.
<Note>
The source pack (of the UMID information) of the
input signal will be recorded on the tape, regardless
of this menu’s setting.
This sets the line on which the UMID
information is to be superimposed.
692*1
UMID
POS
z If it is set to execute gamma correction, the GM
indicator in the time code display lights
constantly.
z When the power of the unit is turned OFF, the
settings in this item also return to [OFF].
z This item is not effective for 1394 output.
0000 BLANK
0001
:
12L
:
0006
:
17L
:
0008
19L
*1
*2
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, 50 Hz (HD,
SD) mode or 50 Hz mode is selected in System Menu No. 25
(SYSTEM FREQ), this item is not displayed.
<Notes>
z The line selected for the menu item No. 501
VITC POS-1 and No. 502 VITC POS-2 settings
cannot be selected for this item.
z Even if F4 (RESET) is pressed while the
settings are changed, the settings does not
return to the factory settings.
z Metadata recorded on the tape will be output
giving UMID information first priority. When
metadata is output, set to a line other than the
original multiplexed line or select “BLANK.”
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<VIDEO> (continued)
<AUDIO>
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
700*1
Description of setting
695*1
For selecting ON or OFF for blanking for the
vertical blanking period of the video signals
during SD tape playback.
For selecting the audio input (CH1) reference
level.
BLANK LINE
CH1 IN LV
0000 BLANK
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
All the lines are forcibly blanked
0001
THRU
None of the lines are blanked.
0002
MANU
701*1
For selecting the audio input (CH2) reference
level.
Blanking ON or OFF is selected on a line-by- line
basis.
CH2 IN LV
<Note>
z When [MANU] is set, press
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
SHIFT
to move to
the sub window and select ON/OFF for the
respective lines. To return from the sub window,
SHIFT
press
again.
702*1
For selecting the audio input (CH3) reference
level.
z Lines that are selected to be blanked in this item
must be blanked in the same way before being
up-converted when playing back the SD tape.
CH3 IN LV
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
Submenu screen <59/60Hz>
01
LINE 11&274
0000 BLANK
The lines are forcibly blanked.
0001
THRU
:
:
:
:
703*1
For selecting the audio input (CH4) reference
level.
The lines are not blanked
12
LINE 22&285
Submenu screen <50Hz>
00
CH4 IN LV
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
0000 BLANK
The lines are forcibly blanked.
LINE 7&320
0001
THRU
:
:
:
:
704*1
For selecting the CUE input reference level.
The lines are not blanked
15
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
-60dB
CUE IN LV
LINE 22&335
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
705
For selecting the audio output (CH1) reference
level.
CH1 OUT LV
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
706
For selecting the audio output (CH2) reference
level.
CH2 OUT LV
00000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
707
For selecting the audio output (CH3) reference
level.
CH3 OUT LV
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
708
For selecting the audio output (CH4) reference
level.
CH4 OUT LV
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<AUDIO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
716*1,2
709
For selecting the CUE output reference level.
For selecting the CH4 input signal.
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
0000
INT SG
CUE OUT LV
CH4 IN SEL
The internal signal is selected.
0001
Digital input signals are selected.
0002
Analog input signals are selected.
<Note>
DIGI
ANA
710
For selecting the audio monitor output (Lch)
reference level.
MONIL OUT LV
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or
AES is selected for the input is determined by the
setting selected for setup menu item No.722 (D IN
SEL 34).
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
717*1,2
For selecting the CH5 input signal.
711
For selecting the audio monitor output (Rch)
reference level.
0000
INT SG
CH5 IN SEL
MONIR OUT
LV
The internal signal is selected.
0000
0001
0002
0003
4dB
0dB
-3dB
-20dB
0001
DIGI
Digital input signals are selected.
0002
ANA
Analog input signals are selected. (CH1 input)
<Note>
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or
AES is selected for the input is determined by the
setting selected for setup menu item No.723 (D IN
SEL 56).
712
For selecting whether the volume of audio
monitor output is interlocked to the volume
adjustment knob or not.
MONI OUT
0000
UNITY
The signals are output at a fixed level.
0001
718*1,2
For selecting the CH6 input signal.
VAR
The signal output is coupled with the head-
phones volume control.
For selecting the CH1 input signal.
0000
INT SG
CH6 IN SEL
The internal signal is selected.
0001
713*1,2
DIGI
Digital input signals are selected.
0000
INT SG
CH1 IN SEL
0002
ANA
The internal signal is selected.
0001
Digital input signals are selected.
0002
Analog input signals are selected.
<Note>
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or
AES is selected for the input is determined by the
setting selected for setup menu item No.721 (D IN
SEL 12).
Analog input signals are selected. (CH2 input)
<Note>
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or
AES is selected for the input is determined by the
setting selected for setup menu item No.723 (D IN
SEL 56).
DIGI
ANA
719*1,2
For selecting the CH7 input signal.
0000
INT SG
CH7 IN SEL
The internal signal is selected.
714*1,2
For selecting the CH2 input signal.
0001
DIGI
Digital input signals are selected.
0000
INT SG
CH2 IN SEL
0002
ANA
The internal signal is selected.
0001
Digital input signals are selected.
0002
Analog input signals are selected.
<Note>
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or
AES is selected for the input is determined by the
setting selected for setup menu item No.721 (D IN
SEL 12).
Analog input signals are selected. (CH3 input)
<Note>
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or
AES is selected for the input is determined by the
setting selected for setup menu item No.724 (D IN
SEL 78).
DIGI
ANA
*1
*2
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or the 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When 1394 is selected in System Menu No. 600 (VIDEO IN
SEL), it is the 1394 input regardless of the selection in this
menu.
715*2
For selecting the CH3 input signal.
0000
INT SG
CH3 IN SEL
The internal signal is selected.
0001
DIGI
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
Digital input signals are selected.
0002
ANA
Analog input signals are selected.
<Note>
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or
AES is selected for the input is determined by the
setting selected for setup menu item No.722 (D IN
SEL 34).
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<AUDIO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
720*1,2
726*1,3
For selecting the CH8 input signal.
For selecting the input signals to be recorded
on the audio CH2 track.
0000
INT SG
CH8 IN SEL
REC CH2
0000
CH1
The internal signal is selected.
0001
DIGI
Audio input CH1 signals
0001
CH2
Digital input signals are selected.
0002
ANA
Audio input CH2 signals
0002
CH3
Analog input signals are selected. (CH4 input)
<Note>
Audio input CH3 signals
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES
is selected for the input is determined by the setting
selected for setup menu item No.724 (D IN SEL 78).
0003
CH4
Audio input CH4 signals
0004
CH1+2
721*1,2
Audio input CH1 and CH2 mixed signals
For selecting the CH1 and CH2 digital input
signals.
0005
CH3+4
Audio input CH3 and CH4 mixed signals
For selecting the input signals to be recorded
on the audio CH3 track.
D IN SEL12
727*1,3
0000
AES/EBU
AES
0001
Serial
SDI
REC CH3
0000
CH1
<Note>
Audio input CH1 signals
When INT SG is selected for the video input
signal, serial input for the audio signal becomes
the HD SDI signal.
0001
CH2
Audio input CH2 signals
0002
CH3
722*1,2
Audio input CH3 signals
For selecting the CH3 and CH4 digital input
signals.
0003
CH4
Audio input CH4 signals
D IN SEL34
0004
CH1+2
0000
AES
Audio input CH1 and CH2 mixed signals
AES/EBU
0001
SDI
0005
CH3+4
Audio input CH3 and CH4 mixed signals
Serial
<Note>
728*1,3
For selecting the input signals to be recorded
on the audio CH4 track.
When INT SG is selected for the video input
signal, serial input for the audio signal becomes
the HD SDI signal.
REC CH4
0000
CH1
723*1,2
For selecting the CH5 and CH6 digital input
signals.
Audio input CH1 signals
0001
CH2
Audio input CH2 signals
D IN SEL56
0000
AES
0002
CH3
AES/EBU
Audio input CH3 signals
0001
SDI
0003
CH4
Serial
Audio input CH4 signals
<Note>
0004
CH1+2
When INT SG is selected for the video input
signal, serial input for the audio signal becomes
the HD SDI signal.
Audio input CH1 and CH2 mixed signals
0005
CH3+4
Audio input CH3 and CH4 mixed signals
724*1,2
For selecting the CH7 and CH8 digital input
signals.
*1
*2
*3
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or the 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When 1394 is selected in System Menu No. 600 (VIDEO IN
SEL), it is the 1394 input regardless of the selection in this
menu.
When 1394 is selected in System Menu No. 600 (VIDEO IN
SEL), the mode is the factory setting mode regardless of the
selection in this menu.
D IN SEL78
0000
AES
AES/EBU
0001
SDI
Serial
<Note>
When INT SG is selected for the video input
signal, serial input for the audio signal becomes
the HD SDI signal.
725*1,3
For selecting the input signals to be recorded
on the audio CH1 track.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
REC CH1
0000
CH1
Audio input CH1 signals
0001
CH2
Audio input CH2 signals
0002
CH3
Audio input CH3 signals
0003
CH4
Audio input CH4 signals
0004
CH1+2
Audio input CH1 and CH2 mixed signals
0005
CH3+4
Audio input CH3 and CH4 mixed signals
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<AUDIO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
729*1,2
732*1,2
For selecting the input signals to be recorded
on the audio CH5 track.
For selecting the input signals to be recorded
on the audio CH8 track.
REC CH5
REC CH8
0000
CH5
0000
CH5
Audio input CH5 signals
Audio input CH5 signals
0001
CH6
0001
CH6
Audio input CH6 signals
Audio input CH6 signals
0002
CH7
0002
CH7
Audio input CH7 signals
Audio input CH7 signals
0003
CH8
0003
CH8
Audio input CH8 signals
Audio input CH8 signals
0004
CH5+6
0004
CH5+6
Audio input CH5 and CH6 mixed signals
Audio input CH5 and CH6 mixed signals
0005
CH7+8
0005
CH7+8
Audio input CH7 and CH8 mixed signals
Audio input CH7 and CH8 mixed signals
730*1,2
733*1
For selecting the input signals to be recorded
on the audio CH6 track.
For selecting the input signals to be recorded
on the CUE track.
REC CH6
REC CUE
0000
CH5
0000
CUE IN
0001
CUE
CH1
Audio input CH5 signals
0001
CH6
Audio input CH6 signals
Audio input CH1 signals
0002
CH7
0002
CH2
Audio input CH7 signals
Audio input CH2 signals
0003
CH8
0003
CH3
Audio input CH8 signals
Audio input CH3 signals
0004
CH5+6
0004
CH4
Audio input CH5 and CH6 mixed signals
Audio input CH4 signals
0005
CH7+8
0005
CH5
Audio input CH7 and CH8 mixed signals
Audio input CH5 signals
0006
CH6
731*1,2
For selecting the input signals to be recorded
on the audio CH7 track.
Audio input CH6 signals
0007
Audio input CH7 signals
0008
Audio input CH8 signals
0009
CH7
REC CH7
0000
CH5
CH8
Audio input CH5 signals
0001
CH6
CH1+2
Audio input CH6 signals
Audio input CH1 and CH2 mixed signals
0002
CH7
0010
CH3+4
Audio input CH7 signals
0003
Audio input CH8 signals
0004
Audio input CH5 and CH6 mixed signals
0005
Audio input CH7 and CH8 mixed signals
Audio input CH3 and CH4 mixed signals
CH8
0011
CH5+6
Audio input CH5 and CH6 mixed signals
CH5+6
0012
CH7+8
Audio input CH7 and CH8 mixed signals
CH7+8
0013
CH1-8
Audio input CH1 to CH8 mixed signals
<Note>
When the VIDEO input switch is set to 1394,
audio is not recorded on the CUE track, and the
sound is muted.
*1
*2
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or the 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
When 1394 is selected in System Menu No. 600 (VIDEO IN
SEL), the mode is the factory setting mode regardless of the
selection in this menu.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<AUDIO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
734*1
For selecting how to process the audio edit
points (IN points and OUT points) during
playback.
739
For selecting the CH2 output status of the main
signal line in the search mode.
0000
OFF
CH2 CUE
SEL
PB FADE
The CUE signal is not output.
0000
AUTO
0001
ON
The status established during recording is fol-
lowed.
The CUE signal is output.
<Note>
0001
Forcibly cut
CUT
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to
0002
Forcibly faded
FADE
740
For selecting the CH3 output status of the main
signal line in the search mode.
735
For selecting whether to superimpose the audio
data on the HD SDI output.
CH3 CUE
SEL
0000
OFF
The CUE signal is not output.
HD EMBD AUD
0001
ON
0000
OFF
The CUE signal is output.
The audio data is not superimposed.
<Note>
0001
ON
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to
For selecting the CH4 output status of the main
signal line in the search mode.
The audio data is superimposed.
For selecting whether to superimpose the audio
data on the SD SDI output.
736
741
SD EMBD AUD
CH4 CUE
SEL
0000
OFF
0000
OFF
The audio data is not superimposed.
The CUE signal is not output.
0001
ON
0001
ON
The audio data is superimposed.
For selecting the mixed signals for the
headphone monitor (Lch and/or Rch).
The CUE signal is output.
<Note>
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to
737
MONI MIX
For selecting the CH5 output status of the main
signal line in the search mode.
0000
OFF
742
Neither the Lch nor Rch signals are mixed.
0001
L
CH5 CUE
SEL
Only the Lch signals are mixed.
0000
OFF
0002
R
The CUE signal is not output.
Only the Rch signals are mixed
0001
ON
0003
L/R
The CUE signal is output.
<Note>
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to
For selecting the CH6 output status of the main
signal line in the search mode.
Both the Lch and Rch signals are mixed.
<Notes>
z At the OFF setting, the signals to be output to
monitor L (or monitor R) are switched to CH1,
CH2, CH3 and so on each time the “L” or “R”
button is pressed. The selected signals are
displayed below the audio level meter.
z At the L, R or L/R setting, the signals of a
multiple number of channels can be mixed and
output. When the number key corresponding to
the channel whose signals are to be monitored is
pressed while the “L” (or “R”) button is held down,
that channel is selected. The selected channel is
displayed below the audio level meter.
743
CH6 CUE
SEL
0000
OFF
The CUE signal is not output.
0001
ON
The CUE signal is output.
<Note>
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to
(Alternatively, the same steps can be taken to
de-select a channel which has already been
selected.) However, only up to 2 channels
among the CH1-CH4 channels and up to 2
channels among the CH5 to CH8 channels can
be selected.
744
For selecting the CH7 output status of the main
signal line in the search mode.
CH7 CUE
SEL
0000
OFF
The CUE signal is not output.
0001
ON
738
For selecting the CH1 output status of the main
signal line in the search mode.
The CUE signal is output.
<Note>
CH1 CUE SEL
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to
0000
OFF
The CUE signal is not output.
0001
ON
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or the 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
The CUE signal is output.
<Note>
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<AUDIO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
749*1
745
For selecting the CH8 output status of the main
signal line in the search mode.
For selecting whether the playback level
adjustment controls are to function in the EE
mode when INT SG has been selected on the
<AUDIO> function menu.
CH8 CUE
SEL
AUDIO PB
VR
0000
OFF
The CUE signal is not output.
0000
DIS
0001
ON
The INT SG output level is fixed at the UNITY
level.
The CUE signal is output.
<Note>
0001
ENA
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to
The INT SG output level can be varied using the
playback level adjustment controls.
746
For selecting the monitor output.
750
For selecting the signal to be output to analog
output CH1.
0000
MANU
MONI CH
SEL
ANA CH1
SEL
The signal selected by the MONITOR SELECT
button is output.
0000
CH1
The CH1 signal is output
0001
AUTO
0001
CH5
The PCM audio signal is output in the j1.0k to
i2.0k speed range; the CUE signal is automati-
cally output at all other speeds.
The CH5 signal is output
For selecting the signal to be output to analog
output CH2.
751
0002
PCM
ANA CH2
SEL
The PCM audio signal is output in the j32k to
i32k speed range.
<Notes>
0000
CH2
The CH2 signal is output.
0001
CH6
z When “AUTO” is selected and a tape in any
format except DVCPRO HD-LP is played back,
the PCM audio signals are output in the j1.0k
to +1.1k speed range.
z This setting takes effect when the L and R
MONITOR SELECT switches on the VTR’s front
panel have selected a channel from CH1 to CH8.
(If they have selected CUE, the CUE signal is
output at all speeds regardless of this menu
item’s setting.)
The CH6 signal is output
For selecting the signal to be output to analog
output CH3.
752
ANA CH3
SEL
0000
CH3
The CH3 signal is output
0001
CH7
The CH7 signal is output
For selecting the signal to be output to analog
output CH4.
753
747
For selecting the channel for the monitor output
to be switched to CUE.
ANA CH4
SEL
0000
CH4
When a setting other than “MANU” has been
selected for setup menu item No.746 (MONI CH
SEL), the CUE signal is automatically output to the
monitor output in accordance with the operation
mode, and the monitor channel to be switched to
CUE is selected automatically.
MON AUTO
SEL
The CH4 signal is output
0001
CH8
The CH8 signal is output
For selecting the audio CH1 signal to be
superimposed onto the SD SDI output.
754
SD SDI CH1
SL
0000
CH1
0000
L/R
The CH1 signal is output.
0001
The CUE signal is output both to the Lch and
Rch.
CH2
0001
L
The CH2 signal is output.
0002
CH3
The CUE signal is output to the Lch only.
0002
R
The CH3 signal is output.
0003
The CH4 signal is output.
0004
The CUE signal is output to the Rch only
<Note>
For audio output conditions, refer to [Audio outputs
CH4
CH5
The CH5 signal is output.
748
For selecting whether to enable or inhibit the
operation of the MONITOR SELECT button on
the front panel.
0005
CH6
The CH6 signal is output.
0006
The CH7 signal is output.
0007
MONI SEL
INH
CH7
0000
OFF
CH8
The button’s operation is enabled.
The CH8 signal is output.
0001
ON
The button’s operation is inhibited.
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or the 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
0002
ON1
In the FULL display mode, operation is prohib-
ited; in the FINE display mode only, operation is
enabled.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
<Note>
Whether to enable or inhibit the button’s operation
can be selected for channels whose signals have
not been mixed by the setup menu item No.737
(MONI MIX) setting.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<AUDIO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
755
For selecting the audio CH2 signal to be
superimposed onto the SD SDI output
759
For selecting the audio output level during DV
format playback.
SD SDI CH2
SL
DV PB ATT
0000
CH1
0000
OFF
The CH1 signal is output.
The audio output level is not attenuated.
0001
CH2
0001
ON
The CH2 signal is output.
The audio output level is attenuated.
0002
CH3
760*1
For selecting whether to mute the sound at the
joins between recordings during DV or DVCAM
format playback.
The CH3 signal is output.
0003
The CH4 signal is output.
0004
CH4
REC PT
MUTE
CH5
0000
OFF
The CH5 signal is output.
The sound is not muted.
0005
CH6
0001
ON
The CH6 signal is output.
The sound is muted
For selecting the type of internal signal.
0006
CH7
761*1
The CH7 signal is output.
0007
CH8
0000
TONE
AUDIO INT
SG
The CH8signal is output.
For selecting the audio CH3 signal to be
superimposed onto the SD SDI output
A sine wave signal is selected.
0001 SILNCE
A silent signal is selected.
756
SD SDI CH3
SL
762
This item enables signals to be recorded and
played back without passing them through the
rate converter in the audio input/output section
(without engaging the digital filter).
0000
CH1
The CH1 signal is output.
0001
The CH2 signal is output.
AUD RATE
CON
CH2
0002
CH3
0000
OFF
The CH3 signal is output.
0003
The CH4 signal is output.
0004
The CH5 signal is output.
0005
The CH6 signal is output.
0006
The CH7 signal is output.
0007
The CH8signal is output.
For selecting the audio CH4 signal to be
superimposed onto the SD SDI output
The signals are recorded and played back with-
out passing them through the rate converter.
0001
The signals are recorded and played back after
passing them through the rate converter.
<Note>
z ON/OFF control is exercised at the same time for
CH1 to CH8. ON or OFF cannot be set indepen-
dently for each channel.
z When the rate converter is turned OFF, video
input must be synchronized with the reference
signal selected in [OUT REF]. (If they are not
synchronized, noise may be generated.)
z In the 60 Hz mode, noise may occur if OFF is set
for the rate converter.
CH4
ON
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
757
SD SDI CH4
SL
0000
CH1
The CH1 signal is output.
763
For selecting the scale display of the audio
level meter.
0001
CH2
The CH2 signal is output.
METER
SCALE
0002
CH3
0000 PEAK_0
The CH3 signal is output.
The audio level is displayed with 0 dB as the
maximum level.
0003
CH4
(This menu is
not displayed
for AJ-
The CH4 signal is output.
0004
The CH5 signal is output.
0005
0001
REF_0
CH5
The audio level is displayed with 0 dB as the
reference level.
<Note>
HD1800E.)
CH6
The CH6 signal is output.
When FS-18 or FS-12 is selected in Setup Menu
No. 776 (REF LEVEL), the system operates as
PEAK-0 regardless of the settings in this menu.
0006
CH7
The CH7 signal is output.
0007
CH8
776
For setting the standard audio level (Headroom)
The CH8signal is output.
0000
FS-20
758
For selecting how to process the digital audio
output slow signals in the JOG, VAR or SHTL
mode.
REF LEVEL
ー 20 dB
0001
FS-18*
JOG PROC
ー 18 dB
0000
OFF
0002
FS-12
The sound without having the digital audio output
slow signals processed is output even when the
STILL mode is established.
ー 12 dB
* The asterisk denotes the factory setting for
AJ-HD1800E.
0001
ON
The sound after having the digital audio output
slow signals processed is output.
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or the 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<AUDIO> (continued)
No./Item
Description of setting
No./Item
Description of setting
785*1
788*1
For setting the impedance of analog audio input
(CH1)
For setting the impedance of analog audio input
(CH4)
IN IMP CH1SL
IN IMP CH4SL
0000
600
0000
600
600 ≠
600 ≠
0001
HIGH
0001
HIGH
High impedance
High impedance
786*1
789*1
For setting the impedance of analog audio input
(CH2)
For setting the impedance of CUE input
0000
600 ≠
600
IN IMP CH2SL
IN IMP CUE SL
0000
600
600 ≠
0001
HIGH
0001
HIGH
High impedance
High impedance
For setting the impedance of analog audio input
(CH3)
790*1
For adjusting the recording level of the CUE
audio signal.
(j∞ to 0 dB to +12 dB)
787*1
CUE REC
VOL
IN IMP CH3SL
0000
600
0032
:
16
:
600 ≠
0001
HIGH
0016
:
0
:
High impedance
0000
-16
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD
or SD) mode or 50 Hz (HD or SD) has been selected as the
system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.
791
For adjusting the playback level of the CUE
audio signal.
(j∞ to 0 dB to +12 dB)
CUE PB VOL
Audio outputs in the search mode
The table below lists the signals which are output to the monitor
and main signal line and which are determined by how the
settings of menu items No.738 to No.745, and No.746 and No.747
are combined.
0032
:
0016
:
16
:
0
:
0000
-16
738 CH1 CUE SEL
746
MONI CH
SEL
747
MON AUTO
SEL
Monitor output
Lch Rch
Main signal line output
:
CH1/CH3/CH5/CH7
CH2/CH4/CH6/CH8
745 CH8 CUE SEL
L/R
L
2
2
MANU
AUTO
PCM*
PCM*
R
2
2
PCM*
PCM*
3
3
2
3
2
L/R
CUE*
CUE*
CUE*
OFF
L
PCM*
3
R
L/R
L
PCM*
CUE*
4
4
2
5
5
PCM
PCM*
PCM*
PCM*
PCM*
R
L/R
L
2
2
2
MANU
PCM*
PCM*
PCM*
PCM*
R
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
L/R
CUE*
CUE*
CUE*
CUE*
CUE*
3
2
AUTO
PCM
L
R
PCM*
CUE*
PCM*
ON
3
2
3
PCM*
CUE*
PCM*
CUE*
4
L/R
L
PCM*
4
PCM*
4
4
5
PCM*
PCM*
PCM*
5
4
R
PCM*
PCM*
<Notes>
*2: The PCM audio output is muted if the tape is played back at a speed in the j1.0k to i2.0k range (or at a speed in the j1.0k to
i1.1k range for a format other than DVCPRO HD-LP).
*3: In the case of the CUE audio output, the PCM signals are output if the tape is played back at a speed in thej1.0k to i2.0k range (or
at a speed in the j1.0 to +1.1k range for a format other than DVCPRO HD-LP).
*4: During fast forwarding or rewinding, the CUE signal is output automatically.
*5: During fast forwarding or rewinding, this signal is muted.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<DIF>
No./Item
880*1
Description of setting
No./Item
892*1
Description of setting
For setting the transfer speed of the IEEE1394
digital interface output.
For setting how to reply when signals requesting
a confirmation of the format is sent from an
external device connected by the IEEE1394
digital interface.
DIF SPEED
DIF SIG CMD
0000
S100
0000
50M
100Mbps
0001
S200
DVDPRO50 is forcibly returned.
0001
25M
200Mbps
0002
S400
DVDPRO is forcibly returned.
0002
DV
400Mbps
<Note>
DV is forcibly returned.
When S100 has been selected as this item’s setting,
DVCPRO HD format signals cannot be input or
output.
0003
AUTO
The reply is the same format as the signal format
output from the IEEE1394 digital interface.
882*1
For setting the input channel.
<Note>
When the unit is connected to a non-linear editing
system using 50M, 25M, and DV signal format, the
non-linear editing system may not operate properly.
In this case, change the setting to return format
information corresponding to the connected signal
format in this menu and then start the system.
0000
:
0063
0
:
63
DIF IN CH
The input channel is fixed at the channel
corresponding to the number specified.
894*1
HD
0064
AUTO
For setting the format of the signals to be output
from the IEEE1394 digital interface in the EE
mode, in recording or when a DVCPRO HD tape is
played back.
The input channel is not fixed at the channel
corresponding to the number specified. The input
channel is initialized to 63 when the power is
turned on.
>
DIF
OUT
0000
HD
DVCPRO HD
883*1
For setting the output channel.
0001
50M
DVCPRO50
0000
:
0063
0
:
63
DIF OUT CH
0002
DV
DV
<Note>
The input channel is fixed at the channel
corresponding to the number specified.
0064
The output channel is not fixed at the channel
corresponding to the number specified. The output
channel is initialized to 63 when the power is
turned on.
Menu item for expansion purposes. Normally,
use DFLT as the setting.
When SD SDI is selected in Setup menu No. 600
(VIDEO IN SEL) and cross-conversion is provided,
data will be output in the format selected in Setup
menu No. 020 (SYS FORMAT) regardless of this
menu selection.
For setting the format of the signals to be output
from the IEEE1394 digital interface when a 50M
format tape is played back.
AUTO
895*1
886*1
50M
OUT
>
DIF
0000
50M
DIF CONFIG
DVCPRO50
0000
0001
:
DFLT
0001
DV
1
:
255
DV
<Note>
0255
When DV is selected as this item’s setting, the closed
caption signals and time code (VITC) signals in the
vertical blanking period are transmitted, but none of
the other signals in the vertical blanking period are
transmitted.
For setting the format of the signals to be output
from the IEEE1394 digital interface when a 25M
format tape is played back.
890*1
For setting the audio channels to which the
signals from the IEEE1394 digital interface are to
be output in the DV format when a DVCPRO HD
tape or 50M format tape is played back or when a
DV tape in 4ch mode is played by the audio
signals and menu No. 891 DIF DV AUDIO is set to
“LOCK48.”
DIF AUD
OUT
896*1
25M
OUT
>
DIF
0000
25M
0000
CH1/2
DVCPRO
CH1 and CH2
0001
DV
0001
CH3/4
DV
CH3 and CH4
899*1
For setting whether the superimposed display is
to be output from the IEEE1394 digital interface
when the format is converted (from HD to 50M,
from HD to DV, from 50M to DV or from 25M to
DV).
891*1
For setting forcible audio mode conversion when a
DV tape is played back and the audio signals are
output in the DV format.
DIF SUPER
DIF DV
AUDIO
0000
THRU
0000
OFF
Normal setting (the signals simply pass through).
The superimposed text is not displayed.
0001
LOCK
0001
ON
Forcible conversion to the LOCK mode (no
frequency conversion)
0002 LOCK48
The superimposed text is displayed.
<Note>
Only TCR is displayed.
Forcible conversion to 48kHz/2CH/LOCK.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
*1
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 Hz (HD, SD) mode, or the 50 Hz
(HD, SD) mode is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM
FREQ), this item is not displayed.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<MENU>
No./Item
Description of setting
A02
C
This VTR is equipped with VTR MEMORY
for
storing the current settings (All of the set values
in the SETUP MENU, the contents of the
P. ON LOAD
registered items in the PF1/PF2 menu, some of
the contents of the function buttons) and VTR
1
4
MEMORY
to
for backing up VTR MEMORY
C
. Only the SETUP MENU of the selected VTR
1
4
MEMORY
to
can be loaded and started on
C
the VTR MEMORY
.
0000
OFF
Operation is started using the previous settings.
0001
USER1
1
The VTR MEMORY
data is loaded and opera-
tion started on the basis of this data.
0002
USER2
2
The VTR MEMORY
data is loaded and opera-
tion started on the basis of this data.
0003
USER3
3
The VTR MEMORY
data is loaded and opera-
tion started on the basis of this data.
0004
USER4
4
The VTR MEMORY
data is loaded and opera-
tion started on the basis of this data.
<Connections with Dolby-E* components>
When the VTR is to be connected to a Dolby-E encoder/decoder for recording or playing back Dolby-E data, set the audio
input and output levels to UNITY, and select the following setup menu item settings.
No.303 AUD EDIT IN = CUT
No.304 AUD EDIT OUT = CUT
No.725 REC CH1 = CH1
No.726 REC CH2 = CH2
No.727 REC CH3 = CH3
No.728 REC CH4 = CH4
No.729 REC CH5 = CH5
No.730 REC CH6 = CH6
No.731 REC CH7 = CH7
No.732 REC CH8 = CH8
No.734 PB FADE = CUT
No.758 JOG PROC = OFF
No.762 AUD RATE CON = OFF
<Notes>
z Synchronize all devices in the system with the REF signal
designated by the Dolby-E device.
z Dolby-E data cannot be recorded or played back in the 60
Hz mode.
z Adjust the timing with the video signals to cover the time
taken by the Dolby-E component for encoding/decoding
outside the VTR.
z Set the bit depth of the Dolby-E encoder/decoder to 16
bits.
z Noise will be output from the ANALOG AUDIO OUT
connectors of the channels through which the Dolby-E
data is passing.
z The audio level meter will deflect beyond the range of its
markings for those channels through which the Dolby-E
data is passing.
z Noise will be output when a tape on which Dolby-E data
has been recorded is played back in the JOG or VAR
mode.
* Dolby and the Double D symbol
are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<How to switch the system frequency>
Follow the steps below to switch the system frequency [59/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD) or 25 Hz (SD), 50 Hz(HD), 50
Hz(SD)].
C
menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.
4 To cancel the setting entered in step 2, press the
F
button while holding down the
button.
The above message is cleared, and after the changed
setting has been restored to the original system menu
No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting, operation returns to the
SYSTEM menu operation screen.
F5
2 Press
(SET) to enter the setting, and after the
function menu shown on the time code display area has
been cleared, the following message appears.
<Note>
If the system menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting has
been changed while a cassette is inserted in the VTR, the
cassette is automatically ejected.
The same procedure as above is also followed when the
system menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting has been
changed by loading the data from an SD memory card in
Note that even if the change being made to the system menu
item No. 25 setting is cancelled, other system menu items
affected by the change will be updated, as will the
associated file names.
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F
3 To make the setting entered in step 2 valid, press the
ENT
button while holding down the
button.
The system is restarted, and the VTR starts operating in
the selected mode.
<Selecting the recording/playback format and sync signals which support the operation mode>
No.25
SYSTEM
FREQ
Format enabling
Format enabling playback
Sync signals
recording
1080/59.94i (HD_LP, HD_SP)
1080/60i (HD_LP, HD_SP)
HD_REF (59.94Hz, 60Hz)
SD_REF (59.94Hz)
1080/59.94i (HD_LP)
720/59.94p (HD_LP)
720/60.00p (HD_LP)
59/60
50i/25P
23/24
720/59.94p(HD_LP, HD_SP)
720/60.00p (HD_LP, HD_SP)
480/59.94i (50M, 25M, DV, DVCAM)
The setting selected for setup menu
item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.
HD_REF (50Hz)
SD_REF (50Hz)
1080/50i (HD_LP, HD_SP)
720/50p (HD_LP)
576/50i (50M, 25M, DV, DVCAM)
576/25p over 50i (50M, 25M, DV)
1080/50i (HD_LP)
720/50p (HD_LP)
The setting selected for setup menu
item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.
1080/23.98p over 59.94i (HD_LP)
720/23.98p over 59.94p (HD_LP/HD_SP)
720/24p over 60.00p (HD_LP/HD_SP)
480/23.98p over 59.94i [2:3 mode]
480/23.98p over 59.94i [2:3:3:2 advance mode]
None
HD_REF (47.96Hz, 48Hz)
HD_REF (50Hz)
SD_REF (50Hz)
720/25p over 60p
720/24p over 60p
25 (HD)
25 (SD)
50 (HD)
50 (SD)
None
None
None
None
The setting selected for setup menu
item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.
720/25p over 60p
720/50p over 60p
720/50p over 60p
SD_REF (50Hz)
HD_REF (50Hz)
SD_REF (50Hz)
The setting selected for setup menu
item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.
SD_REF (50Hz)
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
<Menu management accompanying switching the system frequency>
The system menu and setup menu have some items whose settings differ and other items with which no selection options are
displayed and whose settings are fixed, depending on the switching of the operation mode in response to the setting selected
for system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ). (Refer to the table below.)
System menu and setup menu settings
z Each of the items whose settings differ is saved in the VTR
MEMORY (current file and one of the backup files 1 to 4).
The settings that correspond to each operation mode will
be displayed so that the settings can be performed for
each operation mode.
<50P IN/OUT> 50-pin connector registration
z When the items whose settings differ have been
registered in the <50P IN/OUT> 50-pin connector pins, the
settings corresponding to the operation modes are
allocated to the IN and OUT pins on the basis of the
setting numbers. However, when the upper limit value is
exceeded, the value will be limited to this upper limit.
What has been registered is saved, but bear in mind that
when the data is registered again, it is saved by
overwriting the existing data so that the previously
registered data will be lost.
z If items, whose selection options are not displayed due to
the operation mode, have been registered in the <50P IN/
OUT> 50-pin connector, when an operation mode in which
these options are not displayed is selected, what has been
registered is saved but no operation is possible. Note that
the registered contents on items that are not displayed will
be deleted during the following operations.
Registration of the <PF1> and <PF2> function
buttons
z When the items whose settings differ have been
registered in the <PF1> and <PF2> function buttons, the
settings that correspond to each operation mode will be
displayed so that the settings can be performed for each
operation mode.
z If items, whose selection options are not displayed due to
the operation mode, have been registered in the <PF1> or
<PF2> function button, when an operation mode in which
these options are not displayed is selected, what has been
registered is saved but the function button itself will
become blank and cannot be operated. Note that the
registered contents on items that are not displayed will be
deleted during the following operations.
z When the set value in Setup Menu No. 600 (VIDEO IN
SEL) changes from SD SDI to another set value, or
from another set value to SD SDI,
z When the set value in Setup Menu No. 650 (STYLE)
changes.
z When the set value in Setup Menu No. 600 (VIDEO IN
SEL) changes from SD SDI to another set value or
from another set value to SD SDI.
z When the set value in Setup Menu No. 650 (STYLE)
changes.
<Menus which are displayed>
The menus displayed differ depending on the setting selected for menu item No.25 SYSTEM FREQ.
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)
NO.
05 ENCODER SEL
Menu item
59/60
23/24
50i/25P
25 (HD)
25 (SD)
50 (HD)
50 (SD)
06 V LEVEL CTRL
12 SYS H (HD)
14 SYS SC (SD)
15 VO SYS H (SD)
16 SD SYS H (SD)
18 SCH (SD)
20 AV PHASE
25 SYSTEM FREQ
26 HD SYS H ADV
30 MENU LOCK
000 P-ROLL TIME
001 LOCAL ENA
002 TAPE TIMER
003 REMAIN SEL
004 SYNCRONIZE
005 SUPER
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
006 DISPLAY SEL
007 CHARA H-POS
008 CHARA V-POS
009 CHARA TYPE
010 MONI CONTROL
011 CU-ROLL TIME
No
No
No
No
No
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)
NO.
015 AUTO STEP
Menu item
59/60
23/24
No
50i/25P
25 (HD)
25 (SD)
50 (HD)
No
50 (SD)
No
020 SYS FORMAT
022 PB FORMAT
023 FORMAT SEL
No
No
030 HD FREQUENCY
031 OUT REF
No
No
No
No
No
No
100 SEARCH ENA
101 SHTL MAX
102 FF. REW MAX
104 REF ALARM
105 AUTO EE SEL
106 EJECT EE SEL
107 EE MODE SEL
108 PLAY DELAY
109 CAP. LOCK
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
110 AUTO REW
111 MEMORY STOP
112 FRZ MODE SEL
113 REC INH
114 REC INH LAMP
115 EJECT SW INH
116 EJECT JUMP
118 SP MODE INH
119 CONFI REC
131 PAGE MODE
132 ROTA MODE
133 KEY BEEP
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
134 ALARM BEEP
140 OUTPUT
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
141 VOLUME
142 AUDIO UNITY
143 CASSTT LIGHT
144 TC INPUT
145 FRONT LCD
146 SAVER DISP
200 PARA RUN
202 ID SEL
204 RS232C SEL
205 BAUD RATE
206 DATA LENGTH
207 STOP BIT
208 PARITY
209 RETURN ACK
212 MASTER PORT
300 IN/OUT DEL
301 NEGA FRASH
302 CONFI EDIT
303 AUD EDIT IN
304 AUD EDIT OUT
305 AUTO ENTRY
306 CF ADJ SEL
307 AFTER CUE-UP
308 VAR FWD MAX
309 VAR REV MAX
310 JOG FWD MAX
311 JOG REV MAX
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)
NO.
312 POSTROLL TM
Menu item
59/60
23/24
No
50i/25P
25 (HD)
No
25 (SD)
No
50 (HD)
No
50 (SD)
No
313 CLICK POINT
320 EDIT RPLCE1
321 EDIT RPLCE2
322 EDIT RPLCE3
323 EDIT RPLCE4
324 EDIT RPLCEC
400 STILL TIMER
401 SRC PROTECT
402 DRUM STDBY
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
403 STOP PROTECT
500 VITC BLANK
501 VITC POS-1
502 VITC POS-2
503 TCG MODE
504 RUN MODE
505 TCG REGEN
506 REGEN MODE
507 TC SOURCE
508 BINARY GP
509 PHASE CORR
510 TCG CF FLAG
511 DF MODE
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
512 TC OUT REF
513 VITC OUT
514 HD EMBD VITC
515 HD EMBD LTC
516 TC OUT ADV
517 TCG OUT
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
600 VIDEO IN SEL
601 VIDEO INT SG
602 SDI IN MODE
603 V-MUTE SEL
604 FREEZE SEL
605 INTERPOLATE
606 SD MON O SEL
619 V_FILTER
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
620 DOWNCON MODE
621 UPCON MODE
622 D/C RESP H
623 D/C RESP V
624 U/C RESP H
625 U/C RESP V
626 D/C ENH H
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
627 D/C ENH V
628 U/C ENH H
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
629 U/C ENH V
630 1080i>HD_OUT
632 720p>HD_OUT
636 SD>HD_OUT
638 IN U/C MODE
639 I U/C RESP H
640 I U/C RESP V
641 I U/C ENH H
642 I U/C ENH V
643 IN BLK LINE
650 STYLE
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
651 HUE STYLE (SD)
653 Y LVL (HD)
No
No
No
No
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)
NO.
654 Pb LVL (HD)
Menu item
59/60
23/24
50i/25P
25 (HD)
25 (SD)
50 (HD)
50 (SD)
655 Pr LVL (HD)
656 BK LVL (HD)
658 Y LVL (SD)
659 Pb LVL (SD)
660 Pr LVL (SD)
661 BK LVL (SD)
662 V LEVEL
663 C LEVEL
664 HUE (AJ-HD1800P)/C PHASE (AJ-HD1800E)
665 SETUP LVL (AJ-HD1800P)/BK LVL (AJ-HD1800E)
670 BRIGHTNESS
671 COLOR LEVEL
672 CONTRAST
673 BACKLIGHT
676 BLK CLIP
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
680 CC (F1) BLANK
681 CC (F2) BLANK
682 VO SETUP (HD) (Only AJ-HD1800P)
683 VO SETUP (SD) (Only AJ-HD1800P)
684 EDH (SD)
No
No
685 ESR MODE (SD)
686 CCR MODE (SD)
687 SDI INDEX 0
688 CC REC
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
689 COMP MODE
690 UMID REC
691 UMID GEN
692 UMID POS
693 GAMMA SEL
695 BLANK LINE
700 CH1 IN LV
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
701 CH2 IN LV
702 CH3 IN LV
703 CH4 IN LV
704 CUE IN LV
705 CH1 OUT LV
706 CH2 OUT LV
707 CH3 OUT LV
708 CH4 OUT LV
709 CUE OUT LV
710 MONIL OUT LV
711 MONIR OUT LV
712 MONI OUT
713 CH1 IN SEL
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
714 CH2 IN SEL
715 CH3 IN SEL
716 CH4 IN SEL
717 CH5 IN SEL
718 CH6 IN SEL
719 CH7 IN SEL
720 CH8 IN SEL
721 D IN SEL12
722 D IN SEL34
723 D IN SEL56
724 D IN SEL78
725 REC CH1
726 REC CH2
727 REC CH3
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup menus (continued)
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)
NO.
728 REC CH4
Menu item
59/60
23/24
No
50i/25P
25 (HD)
No
25 (SD)
No
50 (HD)
No
50 (SD)
No
729 REC CH5
No
No
No
No
No
730 REC CH6
No
No
No
No
No
731 REC CH7
No
No
No
No
No
732 REC CH8
No
No
No
No
No
733 REC CUE
No
No
No
No
No
734 PB FADE
No
No
No
No
No
735 HD EMBD AUD
736 SD EMBD AUD
737 MONI MIX
738 CH1 CUE SEL
739 CH2 CUE SEL
740 CH3 CUE SEL
741 CH4 CUE SEL
742 CH5 CUE SEL
743 CH6 CUE SEL
744 CH7 CUE SEL
745 CH8 CUE SEL
746 MONI CH SEL
747 MON AUTO SEL
748 MON SEL INH
749 AUDIO PB VR
750 ANA CH1 SEL
751 ANA CH2 SEL
752 ANA CH3 SEL
753 ANA CH4 SEL
754 SD SDI CH1 SL
755 SD SDI CH2 SL
756 SD SDI CH3 SL
757 SD SDI CH4 SL
758 JOG PROC
No
No
No
No
No
759 DV PB ATT
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
760 REC PT MUTE
761 AUDIN INT SG
762 AUD RATE CON
763 METER SCALE (Only AJ-HD1800P)
776 REF LEVEL
No
No
785 IN IMP CH1SL
786 IN IMP CH2SL
787 IN IMP CH3SL
788 IN IMP CH4SL
789 IN IMP CUE SL
790 CUE REC VOL
791 CUE PB VOL
880 DIF SPEED
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
882 DIF IN CH
883 DIF OUT CH
886 DIF CONFIG
890 DIF AUD OUT
891 DIF DV AUDIO
892 DIF SIG CMD
894 HD>DIF OUT
895 50M>DIF OUT
896 25M>DIF OUT
899 DIF SUPER
A02 P. ON LOAD
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time code and user bits
Time code
Setting the internal time code
1 Set the VTR to the stop mode.
The time code is used when the time code signal generated
by the time code generator (time code signal generator) is to
be recorded on the tape, its values are to be read by the time
code reader (time code signal reader), and the absolute
position of the tape is to be displayed in increments of hours,
minutes, seconds and frames.
2 Set F3 TC/CTL on the <HOME> menu to TC.
F1
3 Set
SOURCE on the <TC> menu to INT (for
selecting the internal time code).
4 Setting F5 RUN MD on the <TC> menu
The time code is written in the sub-code area (data area) of
the helical track. This enables insert editing to be conducted
independently using the time code alone. In addition, the
VTR’s playback speed can be read from the stop mode to
the slow motion playback up to high-speed playback
(approx. 50k normal speed or approx. 100k normal speed
when using a DVCPRO tape).
REC:
The time code advances simultaneously with the
recording.
FREE:
The time code advances, like time, irrespective of the
VTR operation.
The time code values are indicated on the display and
superimposed display.
5 Setting F3 TCG MD on the <TC> menu
REGEN:
The continuity of the underlying time code in place
prior to editing is maintained.
PRE:
The time code can be preset using the operation
panel controls or remote controller.
AUTO:
TCR 00 : 07 : 04 : 23
Hours
Minutes Seconds
Frames
User bits
The time code is automatically switched to REGEN or
PRE depending on the VTR’s operation mode: during
editing, REGEN is selected; at all other times, PRE is
selected.
The “user bits” refers to the 32-bit (8-digit) data frame among
the time code signals which has been released to users. It
enables operator numbers and other values to be recorded.
The alphanumerics which can be used for the user bits are
number 0 to 9 and letters A to F.
6 Registering the TC preset values
Display the <HOME> menu.
<TC/UB>
z Preset (in the preset enable status)
T
1 When
among the number keys is pressed, the
TC display switches to TCG (UBG), and the TCG
value characters (all digits) are highlighted.
T
2 When
is pressed again, one digit is
highlighted, and the change enable status is
established.
3 Input the desired value using the number keys.
The entire input value can be cleared by pressing
0
F
while
holding down .
4 To input the letters used with the users bits, press
F
7
the same number key (toggle by tapping
8
or
) while holding down . To move from one
digit to another, turn the ADJ dial.
ENT
5 To enter the value, press the
key.
6 When the display screen has been changed
C
during the input process or if the
button has
been pressed, the change enable status is
released, and the setting is canceled.
<CTL>
z Reset
Press F4 (TC CLR).
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time code and user bits (continued)
Setting the external time code
Time code and user bits playback
1 Set the VTR to the stop mode.
1 Set the VTR to the stop mode.
2 Set F3 TC/CTL on the <HOME> menu to TC.
2 Set F3 TC/CTL on the <HOME> menu to TC or UB.
TC:
3 If the video input has been set to HD SDI input or INT
SG, set F1 TC SRC on the <TC> menu to EXT-L, SLTC
or SVITC.
The time code is displayed.
UB:
The user bits are displayed.
z In the event that it has become impossible to read the
time code, it is interpolated using the CTL signal.
4 If the video input has been set to SD SDI, set F1 TC
SRC on the <TC> menu to EXT-L or VITC.
3 Press the PLAY button.
<Note>
Playback starts, and the time code appears on the
display.
When 1394 is set for video input, the time code for 1394
input is selected regardless of the selection in F1 TC SRC.
If F3 (SUPER) on the <TC SHIFT> menu is set to ON,
the time code value is superimposed onto the video
signals from the VIDEO OUT3 connector.
Cue time registration, preroll and cue-up
(These functions work only on the HOME, PF1 and
PF2 screens.)
<Notes>
z While a drop frame time code is being read, the colon
between the seconds and frames is replaced with a
period.
z If the time code signal is missing, it is interpolated
automatically using the CTL signal.
z Registration
Register the cue time by pressing the
holding down the
z Presetting
SET
button while
F
button.
The following appears on the display.
T
When the
button is pressed, the characters of the cue
T ¢ R
00:01:04:07 ¢
time or TC/UB display are highlighted. Turn the ADJUST
dial to highlight the characters of the cue time.
The subsequent steps in the registration procedure are
the same as for TCG.
“
“: 1st, 3rd field
An asterisk (¢)
appears here if the
time code signal is
missing.
“¢”: 2nd, 4th fields
(It is not displayed when the speed
exceeds n 0.3a speed.)
z Prerolling
Press the PREROLL button to preroll the tape to the
currently registered CUE point.
In the drop frame mode, the colon
between the seconds and frames is
replaced with a period. (In the 59/60 Hz
mode only)
z Queue up
F
Press the PREROLL button while pressing the
to queue up to the currently registered cue point.
button
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time code and user bits (continued)
Time code recorded on the unit
Time code to be recorded
SBC area
Menu No. 507 TC
SOURCE
Video input
signal selection
VAUX area
Not recorded
SVITC *3 of the input video
signal
INT SG
HD SDI
INT
Internal TCG value (refer to the table 1)
VITC *3 of the input video
signal
SD SDI
Time code for the IEEE 1394
digital input (VAUX area)
1394
INT SG
HD SDI
Not recorded
SVITC *3 of the input video
signal
VITC *3 of the input video
signal
Time code for the TIME CODE IN
connector input *1
(refer to the
table 2)
EXT_L
SD SDI
Time code for the IEEE 1394 digital input
(SBC area)
Time code for the IEEE 1394
digital input (VAUX area)
1394
INT SG
HD SDI
Internal TCG value (refer to the table 1)
Not recorded
SVITC *3 of the input video
signal
SLTC of the input video signal *2
SLTC
(VITC when SD SDI is
selected *4)
VITC *3 of the input video
signal
(refer to the
table 2)
VITC of the input video signal *2
SD SDI
Time code for the IEEE 1394 digital input
(SBC area)
Time code for the IEEE 1394
digital input (VAUX area)
1394
INT SG
HD SDI
Internal TCG value (refer to the table 1)
Not recorded
SVITC *3 of the input video
signal
SVITC of the input video signal *2
SVITC
(VITC when SD SDI is
selected *4)
VITC *3 of the input video
signal
(refer to the
table 2)
VITC of the input video signal *2
SD SDI
1394
Time code for the IEEE 1394 digital input
(SBC area)
Time code for the IEEE 1394
digital input (VAUX area)
*1
*2
*3
*4
When no signal can be detected from the TIME CODE IN connector input, it is the internal TCG value.
When no SLTC or SVITC can be detected from the input video signal, it is the internal TCG value.
When no SVITC can be detected from the input video signal, nothing is recorded.
When SD SDI is selected in the input selection, this becomes VITC. If the selected input signal is other than SD SDI and SLTC/SVITC is
selected, VITC is selected when the input selection is set to SD SDI.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time code and user bits (continued)
Time code recorded on the unit
Table 1
Menu
Time code to be recorded
At the time of normal
At the time of assemble
editing
At the time of insert editing
(time code selection)
No.503
TCG MODE
No.505
TCG REGEN
No.506
REGEN MODE
recording
TC
UB
TC
UB
TC
UB
TC&UB
TC
INT_REGEN
REGEN
INT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
INT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
INT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
---
UB
INT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
PRESET
---
PRESET
AS&IN
ASSEM
INSRT
AS&IN
ASSEM
INSRT
AS&IN
ASSEM
INSRT
INT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
PRESET
TC&UB
TC
PRESET
INT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
PRESET
AUTO
PRESET
PRESET
PRESET
PRESET
INT_REGEN
REGEN
UB
INT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
INT_REGEN
Table 2
Menu
Time code to be recorded
At the time of normal
recording
At the time of assemble
editing
At the time of insert editing
No.503
TCG MODE
No.505
TCG REGEN
No.506
REGEN MODE
TC
UB
TC
UB
TC
UB
TC&UB
TC
EXT_REGEN
REGEN
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
UB
EXT_REGEN
EXT_REGEN
EXT_REGEN
---
TC&UB
TC
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
UB
EXT_REGEN
EXT_REGEN
EXT_REGEN
AS&IN
ASSEM
INSRT
AS&IN
ASSEM
INSRT
AS&IN
ASSEM
INSRT
INT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
EXT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
TC&UB
TC
EXT_REGEN
EXT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
AUTO
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
PRESET
EXT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
PRESET
PRESET
INT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
UB
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
EXT_REGEN
PRESET
EXT_REGEN
INT_REGEN
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Superimpose screen
The control signals, time code, etc. are displayed on this
screen using abbreviations.
Characters displayed
The background of the characters superimposed on the
display screen can be changed using
<TC SHIFT> menu.
F5
(C TYPE) on the
TV monitor
TCR ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢
TCR ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢
TCR ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢
Abbreviations
TV monitor
TV monitor
CTL: Control signal count value
<Note>
TCR: Time code data recorded in the SBC area
TCR.: Time code data recorded in the VAUX area
UBR: User bits data recorded in the SBC area
UBR.: User bits data recorded in the VAUX area
TCG: Time code data of the time code generator
UBG: User bits data of the time code generator
When the 23/24 Hz mode, 25 (HD) mode, or 50 (HD) mode
is selected in System Menu No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), any
superimpose, such as the time code of the SD SDI
MONITOR/VIDEO OUT3 connector, is not displayed. When
the 25 (SD) mode or 50 (SD) mode is selected, any
superimpose, such as the time code of the HD SDI
MONITOR connector, is not displayed.
<Note>
[T¢R], [T¢R.], [U¢R] or [U¢R.] is displayed when the data
Display position
has not been read correctly from the tape.
The position of the characters superimposed on the display
can be changed using F2 (C HPOS) and F3 (C VPOS) on
the <TC SHIFT> menu and the ADJ dial.
TCR ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢
TCR ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢
TV monitor
TV monitor
Operation mode
When T&STA or T&S&M is selected for F4 (DISPLAY) in the
<TC SHIFT> menu, the VTR operation mode is also
displayed.
TCR ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢ : ¢¢
STOP
VTR operation mode
TV monitor
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the audio recording channels and
monitor output
Audio recording channels
Monitor output channels
The audio channels can be selected as shown below using
the AUDIO setup menu items.
When F6 (M MIX) on the <AUDIO SHIFT2> menu is set to
L, R or L/R, the signals of a multiple number of channels can
be mixed and output.
Recording
Signals recorded
track
When the number key corresponding to the channel whose
signals are to be monitored is pressed while the “L” (or “R”)
button is held down, that channel is selected, and its signals
are displayed on the audio level meter. (The same steps can
also be taken to de-select a channel which has already been
selected.) However, only up to 2 channels among the CH1-
CH4 channels and only up to 2 channels among the CH5-
CH8 channels are selected.
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4/
CH1
CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4/
CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4
CH2
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4/
CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4
CH3
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4/
CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4
CH4
(Examples: CH1 + CH3 + CH5 + CH8 can be selected but
CH1 + CH2 + CH4 cannot be selected.)
CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/
CH5+CH6/CH7+CH8
CH5
CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/
CH5+CH6/CH7+CH8
CH6
MONITOR SELECT switches
CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/
CH5+CH6/CH7+CH8
CH7
CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/
CH5+CH6/CH7+CH8
CH8
CUE/CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4/CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/
CUE
CH1+CH2/CH3+CH4/CH5+CH6/CH7+CH8 /
CH1 - CH8
Number keys
Display saving function
This function is provided to extend the service life of the LCD
monitor. It starts up if none of the front panel controls have
been operated or the cassette tape has not been run at all
for about 5 minutes.
While the saving function is working, the LCD monitor
display goes blank, and the “EX” symbol appears on the time
code display area. [The setting for displaying or not
displaying the logo can be selected in Setup Menu No. 146
(SAVER DISP).]
To release the saving function, operate a button or dial on
the front panel or issue a tape transport command from the
controller. The operation performed to release the function
will be executed after the function is released.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rack mounting
The unit can be mounted into a 19-inch standard rack if the
optional rack-mounting adapters (AJ-MA75P : option) are
used. For the installation rails, it is recommended that the rail
and bracket for 18-inch length (part number C-300-S-118) of
Chassis Trak be used.
4 Attach the AJ-MA75P rack-mounting adapters using the
same four screws.
(The complete slide rail and bracket unit is not available from
Panasonic.)
For further details, consult your dealer.
1 Attach the inner members of the slide rails. Refer to the
figure below for the positions where they are screwed
into place.
Rack-mounting adapters
Positions where the right (R) inner member is screwed into place
5 Remove the four rubber feet on the bottom panel of the
VTR, and install the VTR in the rack.
After the VTR has been installed, check that it moves
smoothly along the rails.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
EIAJ standard rack
Inner member
<Notes>
z The length of the screws used is subject to a
restriction. Use screws which are less than 2/5 inch
(10 mm) long.
z Attach the inner member at the same symmetrical
positions on the left (L) side as well.
z Fix the members in place using 3 screws on each
side (total: 6 screws).
z The letters shown in the figure are not actually marked
on the side panels.
Fasten to rack with the
fixing screws.
2 Attach the outer member brackets to the rack. Check
that the height is the same for the left and right brackets.
<CAUTIONS>
z Keep the temperature inside the rack to between 5xC and
40xC (41xF and 104xF).
z Bolt the rack securely to the floor so that it will not topple
3 Remove the four screws at the front used to attach the
left and right side panels.
over when the VTR is pulled out.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video head cleaning
This VTR is equipped with an auto head cleaning function
which automatically reduces the amount of dirt on the video
heads. In order to maximize the VTR’s reliability, however, it
is recommended that the video heads be cleaned as and
when appropriate.
For further details on how to actually clean the heads,
consult with one of Panasonic’s service companies or with
your dealer.
Condensation
Condensation occurs due to the same principle which is
involved when droplets of water form on a window pane of a
heated room. It occurs when the VTR or tape is moved
between places where the temperature or humidity varies
greatly or when, for instance:
z It is moved to a very humid place full of steam or a room
immediately after it has been heated up.
z It is suddenly moved from a cold location to a hot or humid
location.
After moving the VTR to such a location, leave it standing for
about 10 minutes rather than switching on its power
immediately.
If condensation has formed on or in the VTR, the AUTO OFF
lamp lights, and the cassette tape is automatically ejected.
Keep the power supplied and simply wait until the AUTO
OFF lamp goes off.It is recommended that the video heads
be cleaned after the AUTO OFF lamp has gone off.
Maintenance
Before proceeding with maintenance, be absolutely sure to
set the power switch to OFF and take hold of the power plug
and unplug it from the power outlet.
Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet. To remove stubborn
dirt, dilute some kitchen detergent, dip a cloth into the
solution, wring it out well, and wipe. After having removed
the dirt, take up any remaining moisture using a dry cloth.
<Note>
Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinners or other
solvents. They can discolor the external parts surfaces and
remove the finish.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error messages
When a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning lamp lights
up.
When the DIAG menu is opened, a description of the
warning will appear on the front panel LCD area and TV
monitor. Also, when an abnormal operation is detected in
this VTR, the AUTO OFF lamp lights up, and a message
appears on the time code display area.
DIAG menu
This displays the VTR information.
The VTR information includes the warning information and
hour-meter (usage time) information. The DIAG menu
appears on the front panel LCD display or on a TV monitor
when the TV monitor is connected to the VIDEO OUT3
connector in the VTR’s connector area.
_Display of DIAG menu
1 Press the DIAG button.
The DIAG menu screen is now displayed on the TV
monitor.
2 Press the function button on the time code display.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
(WARN): To display the warning information
(HOURS): To display the hour meter information
(UMID): To display the UMID information
(DIF1): To display the DIF status 1 information
(DIF2): To display the DIF status 2 information
The hour meter information display can be scrolled with
the ADJ dial.
3 To exit the DIAG menu, press any other direct menu
button.
ADJ dial
2
1
_Displaying the warning information
z A warning message is displayed whenever a warning
occurs (the warning lamp lights up). When no warnings
have been detected, “NO WARNING” is displayed.
z When
a
multiple number of warnings occur, the
descriptions of each warning can be checked by turning
the ADJ dial.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error messages (continued)
If “T&S&M” has been selected as the setup menu item
No.006 (DISPLAY SEL) setting, a message appears in the
mode display area whenever a warning or error has
occurred. When a multiple number of errors have occurred,
the one with the highest priority is displayed.
_Displaying the hour-meter information
Turn the ADJ dial to move the cursor (¢), and the description
for the item where the cursor is located is shown as a
superimposed display.
No./Item
Description
Priority
Higher
Display and description
H00
Displays in 1-hour increments the time during
which power has been supplied.
Error messages (see error message table):
When any problem arises with the VTR’s
operation, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and an
error message is displayed.
OPERATION
H01
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time
during which the drum has rotated.
INT SG:
DRUM RUN
H02
If, when “INT SG” has been selected as the audio
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time
during which the tape has been running in the FF,
REW, PLAY, SEARCH (JOG, SLOW and SHTL),
REC and EDIT modes (but not in the JOG, SLOW,
SHTL or STILL mode).
Displays in 1-time increments the number of times
the tape has been threaded (loaded) and
unthreaded (unloaded).
F1
input setting by
(VID IN) on the <VIDEO>
menu or by the <AUDIO> or <AUDIO SHIFT1>
menu, and the EDIT button is pressed, this
message is displayed for the first two seconds
when editing is started. In the same way, it is
displayed for the first two seconds when recording
is started.
TAPE RUN
H03
THREADING
H04
NO INPUT:
Displays in 1-time increments the number of front
loading operations.
If, when input signals (but not analog audio
signals) are not supplied to the input connector
F LOADING
H05
F1
selected by
(VID IN) on the <VIDEO> menu
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time
during which the LCD monitor has lighted.
or by the <AUDIO> or <AUDIO SHIFT1> menu,
the EDIT button is pressed, this message is
displayed for the first two seconds when editing is
started. In the same way, it is displayed for the
first two seconds when recording is started.
LCD ON
H11
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time
during which the drum has rotated.
(Can be reset.)
DRUM RUNr
H12
Warning messages
(see warning message table):
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time
during which the tape has been running in the FF,
REW, PLAY, SEARCH (JOG, SLOW and SHTL),
REC and EDIT modes (but not in the JOG, SLOW,
SHTL or STILL mode). (Can be reset.)
Displays in 1-time increments the number of times
the tape has been threaded (loaded) and
unthreaded (unloaded). (Can be reset.)
When a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning
lamp lights, and a warning message is displayed.
When a multiple number of warnings have
occurred, the one with the highest priority is
displayed.
TAPE RUNr
H13
Lower
THREADINGr
H14
Displays in 1-time increments the number of front
loading operations.
_Display of UMID information
(Can be reset.)
F LOADINGr
H15
In the EE mode, the indication is displayed when UMID
information is available in the input signal. When a tape is
played back, the indication is displayed if the UMID
information is available on the tape. If there is no UMID
information, [NO-INFO] is displayed.
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time
during which the LCD monitor has lighted. (Can be
reset.)
LCD ON r
H30
Displays the number of times the power has been
turned on.
POWER ON
Indication
Contents
<Note>
MATNO
COPY
OWNR
POS
Material number
Instance number (number of times for copying)
Country name, Organization name, User name
Elevation, Latitude, Longitude, Reception level from
the GPS satellite at the time of recording
HOLD: It is impossible to receive signals from the
GPS satellite.
The resettable table hour-meter information items will be
reset by your dealer when maintenance or other work is
performed.
2D:
The number of satellites is a few. The
accuracy of elevation information is
insufficient.
3D:
Signals from the GPS satellite are good
(strong).
DATE
TIME
Date
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error messages (continued)
Warning messages
z Display
Priority z Description
z Display
Priority z Description
z VTR operation and remedial action
E-10
FAN STOP ¢
Check that no foreign matter has accumulated on the
fan.
z VTR operation and remedial action
E-92
Higher
1394 INITIAL ERROR
This is displayed when the connections for the IEEE
Higher
This is displayed when the fan motor has stopped. The
name of the fan under abnormal conditions is
displayed as indicated with an asterisk.
Main: The main fan on the rear panel
Power: The fan for the power supply on the rear panel
Mecha: The fan built-in to the unit.
VTR: Operation continues (and a warning beep is
sounded regardless of the menu setting.) When
the Main fan or the Power fan stops for 5
minutes or more, the power supply of the unit is
forcibly turned OFF.
1394 digital interface is invalid.
VTR：The IEEE 1394 digital interface input/output is
stopped.
z
When the cable is connected in a loop configuration,
connect the cable again in a point-to-point
configuration. If the cable is not connected in a loop
configuration, turn the POWER switch from OFF to ON.
E-04
UNKNOWN SIG
This is displayed when the input signal from the IEEE
1394 digital interface is not in the DVCPRO/DV format.
VTR：The recording operation is disabled.
z Confirm that 1394 input is connected properly.
z Check that no foreign matter has accumulated on
the fan.
z Wait for several minutes after turning OFF the
E-90
POWER switch and then turn it ON again.
NOT 1X 100M SIG
E-09
This is displayed when the signal input into the IEEE
1394 digital interface is not at the 1X transfer speed in
DVCPRO HD (100 Mbps) format.
VTR：The recording operation is disabled.*1
z Confirm the 1394 input signals.
E-16
NO RF
This is displayed when a blank part of the tape lasting
for 1 or more seconds has been detected during
playback.
When all of the following conditions have been met, it
will be recognized as a blank part.
z When no signals are output from any of the heads
z When the playback data cannot be read
z When the CTL signal is not present
VTR: Operation continues.
INVALID VIDEO SIG
This is displayed when the video signal input from the
IEEE 1394 digital interface is invalid.
z The warning is displayed during the recording
operation only. In this case, the audio recording is
muted.
VTR：The recording operation is disabled.*1
z Confirm the 1394 input signals.
E-17
z Check the tape. An unrecorded tape may have been
inserted.
E-00
SERVO NOT LOCKED
This is displayed when the servo is not locked for 3 or
more seconds during playback, recording or editing.
VTR: Operation continues.
z Check the tape. A tape recorded using a system
which does not allow playback may have been
inserted.
INVALID AUDIO SIG
This is displayed when the audio signal input from the
IEEE 1394 digital interface is invalid.
z The warning is displayed during the recording
operation only. In this case, the audio recording is
muted.
VTR：The recording operation is disabled.*2
z Confirm the 1394 input signals.
E-18
E-93
INVALID TC MODE (in 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD)
or 50 Hz (HD or SD) mode)
This is displayed during playback if the time code has
been recorded in the drop frame mode. The video
output is disturbed and the audio output is muted at
the time code drop point. The servo lock may be
unlocked.
INVALID TC SIG
This is displayed when the time code information from
the IEEE 1394 digital interface is invalid.
z The warning is displayed during the recording
operation only. In this case, the time code generated
internally is recorded.
VTR：The recording operation is disabled.*3
z Confirm the 1394 input signals.
E-14
VTR: Operation continues.
z Check the tape. If a tape recorded using a variable
frame rate camera is to be played back in this VTR,
the time code must be recorded in the non-drop
frame mode.
E-94
TC SEQUENCE UNMATCH (in 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD
or SD) or 50 Hz (HD or SD) mode)
This is displayed during playback if the correlation
between the active frame information and time code
is irregular. The video output may not be uniform (the
movements may not be smooth).
NO MATCH SIG
This is displayed when the signal input into the IEEE
1394 digital interface has a different system format as
the one set in the unit.
VTR：The recording operation is disabled.*2
z Confirm the 1394 input signals.
Lower
VTR: Operation continues.
z Check the tape. The active frame (first frame where
the frame video is switched) information is recorded
on a tape recorded using a variable frame rate
camera. When such a tape is played back on this
VTR, the 0 frame of the time code must be detected
at the active frame position.
*1 The error indication is always displayed in EE mode. In
this case, the black signals are recorded as the video
signal and the audio signals are muted.
*2 The error indication is always displayed in EE mode. In
this case, the audio signals are muted.
Lower
*3 The error indication is always displayed in EE mode. In
this case, the time code for the internal time code
generator of the unit is recorded as the time code signal.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error messages (continued)
Error messages
z Display
Priority z Description
z Description
z VTR operation and remedial action
Display
z VTR operation and remedial action
E-01
LOW RF
E-20
DEW
When condensation has been detected, the
AUTO OFF lamp lights, the message display
blinks, and the VTR transfers to the EJECT mode.
After the tape has been ejected, the drum
continues to rotate in order to dry out the
condensation.
When the condensation has cleared, the AUTO
OFF lamp goes off, the message display is cleared,
and the VTR is ready for operation again.
z When condensation is detected in the EJECT
mode, the drum starts rotating as soon as it is
detected.
z When condensation is detected while a cassette
is inserted, the drum stops rotating and starts
rotating again after the tape has been ejected.
VTR: EJECT
z Wait with the power on.
If the cassette fails to move up even after 6
Higher
This is indicated when the embed level of the video
head during playback, recording, and editing is about
1/3 the normal level or less and is detected for 1
second or more, or when the CTL level of the A/C
head is about 1/6 of the normal level or less and is
detected for 1 second or more.
z The CTL level is not detected when DV/DVCAM is
played back.
z During recording and editing, only the embed level of
simultaneous playback of video is detected.
VTR: Operation continues.
z Execute the cleaning operation for the video and A/C
heads.
E-02
HIGH ERROR RATE
This is displayed when the error rate increases and
correction or interpolation is performed for either the
video or audio signals.
VTR: Operation continues.
E-29
FRONT LOAD seconds have elapsed since the VTR transferred
to the EJECT mode, the AUTO OFF lamp lights,
and the message display blinks.
<Note>
MOTOR
Lower
If the cassette fails to move down even after 6
seconds have elapsed since the cassette was
inserted, the VTR transfers to the EJECT mode.
VTR: Stops.
z Clean the video heads.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-31
LOADING
MOTOR
If the unloading operation fails to be completed
within 6 seconds, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and
the message display blinks.
<Note>
If the loading operation fails to be completed
within 6 seconds, the VTR transfers to the EJECT
mode (unloading mode).
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-35
When there is no response from the servo
microcomputer for 1 or more seconds, the AUTO
OFF lamp lights, and the message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
SERVO
CONTROL
ERROR
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-37
When the servo microcomputer does not follow
SERVO COMM the instructions of the system control
microcomputer even after 10 seconds have
elapsed, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the
message display blinks.
ERROR
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error messages (continued)
Error messages (continued)
z Description
Display
z Description
z VTR operation and remedial action
Display
z VTR operation and remedial action
E-51
If the take-up reel has turned without engaging
E-69
T REEL
TORQUE ERR
If an abnormal torque applied to the supply reel
motor is detected or if an abnormal current flowing
to the current-sensing resistor is detected, the
AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message display
blinks.
FRONT LOAD the tape for a specific period of time during the
ERROR
tape start or end processing operation while
loading is being performed (at the half position),
the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message
display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
When the tape start or end processing operation is
not completed, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the
message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-70
S REEL
TORQUE ERR
E-52
W-UP REEL
NOT ROTA
If, after the cassette has been inserted, the tape
take-up reel has not wound up the tape while the
total tape amount is not detected and while the
tape is traveling, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and
the message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
If an abnormal tension is detected at the supply
side in the capstan mode, the AUTO OFF lamp
lights, and the message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
E-71
CAP TENSION
ERROR
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-53
WINDUP
ERROR
If, after the total tape amount has been detected,
the amount of tape wound up onto the take-up
reel and the amount of tape supplied by the
supply reel differ to an abnormal extent while the
tape is traveling, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and
the message display blinks.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
If an abnormal tension at the supply side is
detected in the reel mode, the AUTO OFF lamp
lights, and the message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
E-72
REEL
TENSION
ERROR
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
E-73
REEL DIR
UNMATCH
If the take-up reel motor is running in the reverse
direction, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the
message display blinks.
ON again.
E-55
UNLOAD
ERROR
If the tape has not been wound up during
unloading, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the
message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
If excess torque being applied to the cylinder motor
is detected, this error number flashes on the
display.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
When the tape start or end processing operation is
not completed, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the
message display blinks.
E-74
DRUM
TORQUE
ERROR
E-57
S-FF/REW
TIMEOVER
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
If the rotational speed of the cylinder motor is
abnormally slow, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and
the message display blinks.
E-FF
If the tape start and tape end are detected at the
same time either during or after loading, the AUTO
OFF lamp lights, and the message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-59
DRUM ROTA
TOO SLOW
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-60
DRUM ROTA
TOO FAST
If the rotational speed of the cylinder motor is
abnormally high, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and
the message display blinks.
If the error message display persists even after the
VTR has been shut down and started up again,
consult your dealer.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-61
CAP ROTA
TOO SLOW
If the rotational speed of the cylinder motor is
abnormally slow, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and
the message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-64
S REEL ROTA
TOO FAST
If the supply reel motor rotates at an abnormally
fast rate, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the
message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
E-67
T REEL ROTA
TOO FAST
If the take-up reel motor rotates at an abnormally
fast rate, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the
message display blinks.
VTR: Stops.
z Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to
ON again.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C interface
The VTR can be operated by commands when the RS-232C
interface is used. (Refer to the command tables on page
Hardware specifications
External interface specifications
_Condition for acknowledging commands
from RS-232C interface
zConnector pin specifications
Connector: D-SUB 25-pin
(crossover cable supported)
Setup menu item No.204
(RS232C SEL)：ON
Pin No.
Signal
Description
If the above condition is not met,
FG
1
2
3
Protective ground (frame ground)
Received data (data is sent to PC)
[ACK]+[STX]ER001[EXT] is returned to the external
component. Whether [ACK] is returned depends on
the setting which has been selected for setup menu
item No.209 (RETURN ACK).
RXD
TXD
Transmitted data (data is received from
PC)
CTS
RTS
DTR
SG
4
5
Clear to send (shorted with pin 5)
Request to send (shorted with pin 4)
Data terminal ready (no processing)
Signal ground
6
7
DSR
Data set ready (+ voltage output after
communication enable status)
20
z Example of connection with controller (PC)
(Using crossover cable with D-SUB 25-pin connectors)
PC side
(D-SUB 25-pin connector)
VTR side
FG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
FG
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
SG
2
3
4
5
6
7
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
SG
DTR 20
20 DSR
(Using crossover cable with D-SUB 9-pin and D-SUB 25-
pin connectors)
PC side
(D-SUB 9-pin connector)
VTR side
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
FG
2
3
4
5
6
7
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
SG
20 DSR
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C interface (continued)
2.Send format
[controller (PC) > VTR]
Software specifications (protocol)
The following responses are for command instructions.
Multiple responses may be made if necessary.
1.Communication parameters
Communicati
Asynchronous, full duplex
on system
Transfer rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps
_Data format
Bit length
Stop bit
Parity bit
ACK code
7 bits or 8 bits
1 bit or 2 bits
None, odd or even
[STX]
[command]
[:]
[data]
[ETX]
02h
XX XX XX
3Ah
XX.....XX
03h
Returned or not returned
<Note>
20H<XX<7FH
(XX=ASCII code: symbols, numbers, upper-case let-
ters)
ACK is the code which is returned from the VTR
to the controller when data has been successfully
sent from the controller.
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.
The settings can be changed in the following Setup Menu.
[command]:
This is the command identifier (3 bytes).
A 3-byte identifier (ASCII code: symbols, numbers,
upper-case letters) is sent as the command.
Communicati
Setup menu item
on parameter
Transfer rate No.205 BAUD RATE
[:]:
The colon is the code serving as a delimiter between
the command and data.
Bit length
Stop bit
Parity bit
ACK code
No.206 DATA LENGTH
No.207 STOP BIT
No.208 PARITY
[data]:
No.209 RETURN ACK
Data (ASCII code: symbols, numbers, upper-case let-
ters) can be added in the number of bytes required.
_Outline of procedure for sending data from
controller
1 The send command starts with STX (start of text =
02h).
The command is then identified by
COMMAND which follows, and the data is added as
required.
The command ends with ETX (end of text = 03h).
2 When a different command is to be sent, a response
is awaited from the VTR, and then the command is
3 If STX is sent again before ETX is sent, the receive
data buffer inside the VTR is cleared. A command
error is returned to the controller, and the data is
newly processed with STX which was received again
at the head.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C interface (continued)
3.Return format
4.Error code table
[VTR > controller (PC)]
The following responses are made to the commands. If
necessary, more than one response is made.
ER001 : Invalid command
zUnsupported command received
zCommand execution error
ER002 : Parameter error
ER102 : VTR mode error
(front loading motor)
ER103 : VTR mode error
(loading motor)
ER104 : VTR mode error
(drum, capstan system)
_When the communication has ended suc-
cessfully
1.The receive completion message is returned.
[ACK]
06h
ER105 : VTR mode error (reel system)
ER106 : VTR mode error (tension system)
ER108 : VTR condensation error
ER1FF : VTR system error
2.The execution completion message is returned.
[STX]
[command]
[data]
[ETX]
02h
XX XX XX
XX.....XX
03h
[command]:
This is the message (data) which is returned or the
execution completion message identifier.
[data]:
This is the data to be returned. It can be omitted.
example:
Send command
[STX] OPL [ETX]
Return message (data)
[ACK] [STX] OPL [ETX]
_When the communication has ended
unsuccessfully
[NACK]
15h
_When processing is not possible due to
incorrect data or problem with the VTR
1.The receive completion message is returned.
[ACK]
06h
2.An error code is returned.
[STX]
[E R N1 N2 N3]
[ETX]
02h
03h
error code
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C interface (continued)
5.Command table
_Commands relating to operation control
VTR
operation
Return (completion)
message
Send command
<Notes>
SHTL
FORWARD
[STX] OSF:data [ETX]←→ [STX] OSF [ETX]
z As the return (completion) message, [ACK] is returned
when data is received, and only the execution message
which is subsequently returned is listed in the table.
z If a command not listed in the table is received, ER001
(invalid command) is returned after [ACK].
This is the forward direction shuttle command.
data = n:speed data
0:STILL
1:k0.03
2:k0.1
3:k0.2
4:k0.5
5:k1
6:k2.0
VTR
operation
Return (completion)
message
Send command
STOP
[STX] OSP [ETX] ←→
[STX] OSP [ETX]
(1.85k for formats other than
DVCPROHD-LP)
7:k4.9
8:k9.8
9:k16
This command is for stopping the tape transport. The
resulting output picture and sound statuses differ
according to the setting selected for the setup menu
item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).
A:k32
For details, refer to the setup menus.
<Note>
EJECT
The 16k and 32k speeds differ according to the
setting selected for setup menu item No.101 (SHTL
MAX).
[STX] OEJ [ETX]
←→
[STX] OEJ [ETX]
This command is for ejecting the cassette tape. The
resulting output picture and sound statuses differ
according to the setting selected for the setup menu
item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).
SHTL
REVERSE
[STX] OSR:data [ETX]←→ [STX] OSR [ETX]
This is the reverse direction shuttle command.
data = n:speed data
For details, refer to the setup menus.
PLAY
[STX] OPL [ETX]
←→
[STX] OPL [ETX]
0:STILL
1:k0.03
2:k0.1
3:k0.2
4:k0.5
This command is for starting playback.
REWIND
[STX] ORW [ETX] ←→
[STX] ORW [ETX]
5:k1
This command is for rewinding the tape. The
resulting output picture and sound statuses differ
according to the setting selected for the setup menu
item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).
The maximum speed differs according to the setting
selected for the setup menu item No.102 (FF. REW
MAX).
6:k2.0
(1.85k for formats other than
DVCPROHD-LP)
7:k4.9
8:k9.8
9:k16
A:k32
For details, refer to the setup menus.
<Note>
FAST
FORWARD
[STX] OFF [ETX]
←→
[STX] OFF [ETX]
The 16k and 32k speeds differ according to the
setting selected for setup menu item No.101 (SHTL
MAX).
This command is for fast forwarding the tape. The
resulting output picture and sound statuses differ
according to the setting selected for the setup menu
item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).
The maximum speed differs according to the setting
selected for the setup menu item No.102 (FF. REW
MAX).
STANDBY
OFF
[STX] OBF [ETX] ←→
[STX] OBF [ETX]
This command is for setting the VTR to standby OFF.
[STX] OBN [ETX] ←→ [STX] OBN [ETX]
STANDBY
ON
For details, refer to the setup menus.
This command is for setting the VTR to standby ON.
REC
[STX] ORC [ETX] ←→
[STX] ORC [ETX]
This command is for starting recording.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C interface (continued)
_Commands relating to inquiries
<Notes>
z In terms of the return (completion) message, [ACK] is
returned when data is received, and only the execution
message which is subsequently returned is listed in the
table.
z In the case of commands not listed in the table below,
ER001 (invalid command) is returned after [ACK].
VTR
operation
Return (completion)
message
Send command
CTL/TC
DATA
[STX] QCD [ETX] ←→
[STX] CD data [ETX]
This command is for inquiring about the counter
value.
REQUEST
data =f w gh mm ss ff
f
=
F
w =
gh=
S
With CTL:
g
=
SP(20h):for a plus display
j(2Dh):for a minus display
0 to 9:hours
h
=
With TC:
gh
mm
ss
=
=
=
00 to 23:hours
00 to 59:minutes
00 to 59:seconds
(525i system)
ff
=
00 to 29:frames
<Note>
CTL or TC is returned, whichever corresponds to the
front display mode.
STATUS
REQUEST
[STX] QOP [ETX] ←→ [STX] ＊＊＊ [ETX]
This command is for inquiring about the VTR’s
operation mode.
＊＊＊ = OEJ: EJECT
OFF: FAST FORWARD
OPL: PLAY
ORC: REC
ORW:REWIND
OSP: STOP (including STANDBY ON)
SRS: (IN/OUT) PREROLL
OBF: STAND BY OFF
OSF: SHTL FORWARD
OSR: SHTL REVERSE
OJG: JOG FORWARD/REVERSE
OSW: VAR FORWARD/REVERSE
EAE: AUTO EDIT
EON: EDIT ON (MANUAL EDIT)
EPV: PREVIEW
ERV: REVIEW
ID
[STX] QID [ETX]
←→
[STX] data [ETX]
(VTR No.)
REQUEST
This command is for inquiring about the VTR used.
data =AJ-HD1800
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RS-232C interface (continued)
_Microsoft QuickBASIC sample program
CLS
STX$ = CHR$(&H2): ETX$ = CHR$ (&H3): NAK$ = CHR$(15): ACK$ = CHR$(&H6)
PRINT "*** RS-232C COMMUNICATION SAMPLE PROGRAM ***"
PRINT "Type Command 'QUIT' to quit."
PRINT
REM *** Communication Port Initial & Open ***
REM Port 1,9600Bps,No parity,8 bit data,1 stop bit
OPEN "COM1:9600,N,8,1" FOR RANDOM AS #1 LEN = 256
REM *** Input Command & Send Command ***
SendCmd:
INPUT "Input Command ="; SEND$
IF SEND$ = "QUIT" THEN GOTO ProgEnd
PRINT #1, STX$ + SEND$ + ETX$
REM *** Wait for Receive Command ***
WHILE LOC(1) = 0
WAITKEY$ = INKEY$
IF WAITKEY$ = "Q" THEN PRINT "*** Quit ***": GOTO ProgEnd
WEND
REM *** Receive Command ***
RecvCmd:
RECV$ = INPUT$(1, #1)
IF RECV$ = STX$ THEN RECV$ = "[Stx]"
IF RECV$ = ACK$ THEN RECV$ = "[Ack]"
IF RECV$ = NAK$ THEN RECV$ = "[Nak]"
IF RECV$ = ETX$ THEN BUFFER$ = BUFFER$ + "[Etx]": GOTO DispOut
BUFFER$ = BUFFER$ + RECV$
GOTO RecvCmd
REM *** Output Receive Command ***
DispOut:
PRINT "Receive Command ="; BUFFER$
PRINT
BUFFER$ = ""
GOTO SendCmd
REM *** End Program ***
ProgEnd:
CLOSE
END
Microsoft QuickBASIC is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector signals
VIDEO IN
AUDIO OUT
HD SERIAL IN
AUDIO OUT
(DIGITAL)
BNC k 4 (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6,
CH7/CH8), AES/EBU format
BNC k 1, active-through (BNC k 1)
(DIGITAL)
BNC k 2, loop-through, 75h termination
switch provided
AUDIO OUT
(ANALOG)
HD/SD REF IN
XLR k 4(CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4)
SD SERIAL IN
HD SERIAL OUT
(DIGITAL)
BNC k 1, active-through (BNC k 1)
(DIGITAL)
BNC k 4
SD SERIAL OUT
(DIGITAL)
BNC k 2
VIDEO OUT
CUE OUT
TIME CODE OUT XLR k 1
MONITOR OUT
HEADPHONES
(FRONT)
XLR k 1
HD SERIAL OUT
BNC k 4
XLR k 2(LÅAR)
(DIGITAL)
SD SERIAL OUT
(DIGITAL)
M6
BNC k 2
ANALOG
COMPOSITE
OUT
BNC k 3
RS-422A REMOTE(9P)
z REMOTE IN/OUT
AUDIO IN
Pin No.
Signal
AUDIO IN
(DIGITAL)
AUDIO IN
(ANALOG)
HD SERIAL IN
(DIGITAL)
SD SERIAL IN
(DIGITAL)
CUE IN
BNC k 4 (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6,
CH7/CH8), AES/EBU format
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FRAME GROUND
TRANSMIT A
RECEIVE B
RECEIVE COMMON
====
TRANSMIT COMMON
TRANSMIT B
RECEIVE A
XLR k 4(CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4)
BNC k 1, active-through (BNC k 1)
BNC k 1, active-through (BNC k 1)
XLR k 1
XLR k 1
TIME CODE IN
FRAME GROUND
z REMOTE OUT
Pin No.
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FRAME GROUND
RECEIVE A
TRANSMIT B
TRANSMIT COMMON
====
RECEIVE COMMON
RECEIVE B
TRANSMIT A
FRAME GROUND
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connector signals (continued)
PARALLEL REMOTE (50P)
Refer to 50P IN/OUT ASSIGN on the function menu (page
74) for the connection pin signals.
RS-232C
ENCODER REMOTE(15P)
(D-SUB 25-pin, crossover cable supported)
Pin No.
Signal
Pin No.
Signal
Description
1
4
7
FRAME GROUND
REM (G)
REM RX (X)
REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL RECEIVE
REM TX (X)
1
2
3
FG
RXD
TXD
Protective ground (frame ground)
Received data (data is sent to PC)
Transmitted data (data is received from
PC)
8
REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL TRANSMIT
REM RX (Y)
REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL RECEIVE
REM TX (Y)
4
5
6
7
20
CTS
RTS
DTR
SG
Clear to send (shorted with pin 5)
Request to send (shorted with pin 4)
Data terminal ready (no processing)
Signal ground
Data set ready (+ voltage output after
communication enable status)
14
15
REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL TRANSMIT
DSR
EMERGENCY EJECT
Procedure to ejecting the tape manually in an emergency
If the cassette tape fails to be ejected even when the EJECT button is pressed, it can be ejected as follows.
z Follow the steps below after making absolutely sure that the unit’s power has been turned off.
1 Remove the top panel.
3 Check that the posts have unloaded the tape and that the
tape is completely housed inside the cassette.
2 Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to push in the red plastic
gear (A) and turn it counterclockwise while keeping it
pushed in. The mechanism that winds up the tape is
activated by this, and it makes a latching sound. Ignore
the sound, and turn the gear through about 10
revolutions.
4 When the tape returns to the cassette case completely,
remove the cassette by pressing and turning the red
plastic gear (B) clockwise for front loading as shown in
the illustration.
<Note>
When closing the cassette cover, take care not to catch
the tape.
<Note>
Turning the gear more than necessary will strain the
cassette, possibly resulting in tape damage.
Plastic gear
(B)
Plastic gear
(A)
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
[GENERAL]
[VIDEO]
Power supply:
Power consumption: 125 W
AC 100-240 V , 50/60 Hz
Sampling frequencies:
Y:
74.176 MHz
PB/PR: 37.088 MHz (1080/59.94i, 720/59.94p)
Y
74.25 MHz
PB/PR: 37.125 MHz (1080/50i, 720/50p)
Quantizing:
indicates safety information.
Operating ambient temperature:
5 xC to 40 xC (41 xF to 104 xF)
Operating ambient humidity:
10% to 80% (no condensation)
Storage temperature:
–20°C to 60°C (–4°F to 140°F)
Dimensions (W k H k D):
424 mm (max. 435.4 mm) a 175.2 mm a 417 mm
16-3/4 inches (max. 17-3/16 inches) a 6-15/16 inches a
16-7/16 inches
8 bits
Video compression method:
DV-Based Compression (SMPTE370M, 317M)
Video compression rate:
1/6.7
Error correction:
Reed-Solomon product code
Video recording bit rate:
100 Mbps
(not including supporting feet, jacks and connectors, JOG dial
and fan)
Video Input Connectors
Weight:
HD serial digital input:
19.5 kg (43.0 lb)
BNC a 1
Recording format:
(Complies with the SMPTE 292M/296M/299M standards),
BNC a 1 (active-through)
DVCPRO HD-LP
Video signals recorded:
1080i (50 Hz/59.94 Hz switching)
720p (50 Hz, 59.94 Hz and 60 Hz <only for Varicam>
switching)
SD serial digital input:
BNC a 1
(Complies with the SMPTE 259M-C/272M-A, ITU-R
BT.656-4 standards),
BNC a 1 (active-through)
480i/59.94Hz
576i/50Hz
Reference input
Audio signals recorded:
48 kHz, 16 bits, 8 channels
Recording tracks:
Black burst/HD3 value SYNC auto switching
BNC a 2 (Loop through), 75 h ON/OFF switching
z Digital video/audio:
Helical track
z Time code:
Helical track (sub code area)
z Cue track:
Video Output Connectors
HD serial digital output:
BNC a 3
(Complies with the SMPTE 292M/296M/299M standards)
BNC a 1 (monitor output with superimposed display)
SD serial digital output:
1 track
z Control (CTL) track:
BNCa1
1 track
Tape speed:
67.64 mm/sec. (in 59.94 Hz mode)
67.70 mm/sec. (in 50 or 60 Hz mode)
Tape used:
Metal tape
Recording time:
126 minutes (using XL cassette)
92 minutes (using L cassette)
32 minutes (using M cassette)
FF/REW time:
(Complies with the SMPTE 259M-C/272M-A, ITU-R BT.656-4
standards)
BNC a 1 (monitor output with superimposed display)
Analog composite output:
BNC a 3
VIDEO1, VIDEO2, VIDEO3 (Super ON/OFF selectable)
To be output during SD playback or down-converting
Approx. 1 min. 30 sec.
(when XL cassette is used and d100a speed is selected)
Search speed:
d100a
Digital slow:
j1k to i2k
(when playing back tapes recorded using the DVCPRO HD-
LP format)
j1k to i1.1k
(when playing back tapes recorded using any other format)
Editing accuracy:
d0 frames
(when time code is used, in 50 Hz, 59.94 Hz or 60 Hz mode)
Tape timer accuracy:
d1 frame (when continuous CTL signal is used)
Servo lock time:
Less than 0.3 sec. (from standby ON)
Loading time:
Approx. 4 sec. (using M/L cassette),
Approx. 6 sec. (using XL cassette)
Audio split editing:
Provided
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications (continued)
[VIDEO] (continued)
Video signal adjustment ranges
z Component style
Audio Input Connectors
Analog input (CH1 to CH4)
HD/SD SDI, composite output Y gain:
XLR k 4, 600 h/high impedance (selectable),
+4/0/j3/j20 dBu selectable
Digital input (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6, CH7/CH8)
BNC k 4, AES/EBU format
–
to +3 dB
HD/SD SDI, composite output PB gain:
to +3 dB
HD/SD SDI, composite output PR gain:
to +3 dB
–
HD serial digital input
–
BNC×1
HD/SD SDI, composite output Y black level:
d10%
(Complies with the SMPTE 292M/296M/299M standards)
BNC k 1 (active-through)
z Composite style
SD serial digital input
HD/SD SDI, composite output video gain:
BNC×1
–
to +6 dB
HD/SD SDI, composite output chroma gain:
to +3 dB
(Complies with the SMPTE 259M-C/272M-A, ITU-R BT.656-4
standards)
BNC k 1 (active-through)
Cue track input
–
1
HD/SD SDI, composite output chroma phase * :
d30x
HD/SD SDI, composite output setup:
d10%
XLR k 1, 600 h/high impedance (selectable)
+4/0/j3/j20/j60 dBu switchable
z System phase
Audio output Connectors
Analog output (CH1 to CH4)
HD serial digital output system phase
1080i: d1.0H (13.5 nS step)
59.94/60 Hz :d2200 Sample
XLR k4, low impedance
+4/0/j3/j20 dBu switchable
Digital output (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6, CH7/CH8)
BNC k 4, AES/EBU format
HD serial digital output
50 Hz
:d2640 Sample
23.98/24 Hz :d2750 Sample
720p:d1.0H (13.5 nS steps)
59.94/60 Hz :d1650 Sample
BNC k 4
50 Hz
:d1980 Sample
(complies with SMPTE 292M/296M/299M standards)
SD serial digital output
SD serial digital/composite video output system phase
d1.0H（37 nS steps）
BNC k 2
59.94 Hz
50 Hz
:d1716 Sample
:d1728 Sample
(Complies with the SMPTE 259M-C/272M-A, ITU-R BT.656-4
standards)
Composite video output SC phase:
d180x or more
Cue track output
XLR k 1, low impedance
+4/0/j3/j20 dBu switchable
Monitor output
XLR k 2, low impedance
+4/0/j3/j20 dBu switchable
Headphone output
*1: Only the SD SDI composite output of SD tape playback is valid
in the 50 Hz or 25 Hz mode.
[AUDIO]
M6、8 h, Level variable
Digital Audio
Sampling frequency:
48 kHz (synchronized with video)
Quantizing:
Audio level adjustment range
–
to +12 dB
16 bits
Frequency response:
20 Hz to 20 kHz d1.0 dB (at reference level)
Dynamic range:
Better than 90 dB (1 kHz, emphasis OFF)
Distortion:
Less than 0.05% (1 kHz, emphasis OFF, reference level)
Crosstalk:
Less than j80 dB (1 kHz, between 2 channels)
Wow & flutter:
Below measurable limit
Headroom:
20/18/12dB selectable
Cue Track
Frequency response:
300 Hz to 6 kHz d3 dB
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications (continued)
[OTHER INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS]
ime code input
XLR k 1, 0.5 Vp-p to 8.0 Vp-p, 10 kh
Time code output
XLR k 1, low impedance
2.0 d 0.5 Vp-p, (with 600 ≠ load)
RS-422A input
D-sub 9-pin, RS-422A interface
RS-422A output
D-sub 9-pin, RS-422A interface
RS-232C
D-sub 25-pin, RS-232C interface
Parallel input/output
D-sub 50-pin
Encoder remote
D-sub 15-pin
1394 input/output connector
Connector: 6-pin type
Transmission rate: 400 Mbps, 200 Mbps, 100 Mbps selectable
Transmission data:
Complies with IEEE 1394-1995
Complies with IEC 61883 Part 1, Part 2
Control command:
Complies with AV/C Command Set
[MONITOR]
3.5-inch LCD color monitor, 21 megapixels
(4:3 aspect ratio)
[OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES]
Rack-mounting adapters:
AJ-MA75P
[ACCESSORIES]
Power supply cord k 1 (AJ-HD1800P)
Power supply cord k 2 (AJ-HD1800E)
Inrush current, measured according to European standard
EN55103-1: 10.4 A (240 V)
Weight and dimensions shown are approximate.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment
(private households)
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products
should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these products to designated collection points, where they will
be accepted on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may be able to return your products to your
local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product.
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on
human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. Please contact your local authority
for further details of your nearest designated collection point.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Panasonic Broadcast & Television Systems Company
Unit Company of Panasonic Corporation of North America
Executive Office:
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7000
EASTERN ZONE:
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7196
Southeast Region: (201) 348-7162
WESTERN ZONE:
3330 Cahuenga Blvd W., Los Angeles, CA 90068 (323) 436-3500
Government Marketing Department:
One Panasonic Way 2E-10, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7587
Broadcast PARTS INFORMATION & ORDERING:
9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (EST) (800) 334-4881/24 Hr. Fax (800) 334-4880
Emergency after hour parts orders (800) 334-4881
TECHNICAL SUPPORT:
Emergency 24 Hour Service (800) 222-0741
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3 (905) 624-5010
Panasonic de Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Av angel Urraza Num. 1209 Col. de Valle 03100 Mexico, D.F. (52) 1 951 2127
Panasonic Puerto Rico Inc.
San Gabriel Industrial Park, 65th Infantry Ave., Km. 9.5, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00630 (787) 750-4300
Professional & Broadcast IT Systems Business Unit Europe
Panasonic AVC Systems Europe a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Hagenauer Str. 43, 65203 Wiesbaden-Biebrich Deutschland Tel: 49-611-235-481
P E
© 2007 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|